CELEX: 32011D0314
Language: mt
Date: 2011-05-12 00:00:00
Title: 2011/314/UE: Deċiżjoni tal-Kummissjoni tat- 12 ta’ Mejju 2011 dwar l-ispeċifikazzjoni teknika għall-interoperabbiltà relatata mas-subsistema ta' “l-operat u l-immaniġġjar tat-traffiku” tas-sistema ferrovjarja konvenzjonali trans-Ewropea (notifikata bid-dokument numru C(2011) 3099)  Test b’relevanza għaż-ŻEE

31.5.2011   
               
               
                  MT EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
               
               
                  Il-Ġurnal Uffiċjali tal-Unjoni Ewropea
               
               
                  L 144/1
               
            DEĊIŻJONI TAL-KUMMISSJONI
      tat-12 ta’ Mejju 2011
      dwar l-ispeċifikazzjoni teknika għall-interoperabbiltà relatata mas-subsistema ta' “l-operat u l-immaniġġjar tat-traffiku” tas-sistema ferrovjarja konvenzjonali trans-Ewropea
      (notifikata bid-dokument numru C(2011) 3099)
      (Test b’relevanza għaż-ŻEE)
      (2011/314/UE)
      IL-KUMMISSJONI EWROPEA,
      Wara li kkunsidrat it-Trattat dwar il-Funzjonament tal-Unjoni Ewropea,
      Wara li kkunsidrat id-Direttiva 2008/57/KE tal-Parlament Ewropew u tal-Kunsill tas-17 ta' Ġunju 2008 dwar l-interoperabbiltà tas-sistema ferrovjarja fil-Komunità (1), u b’mod partikolari l-Artikolu 6(1) tagħha,
      Billi:
      
                  (1)
               
               
                  L-Artikolu 12 tar-Regolament (KE) Nru 881/2004 tal-Parlament Ewropew u tal-Kunsill tad-29 ta' April 2004 li jistabbilixxi Aġenzija Ewropea tal-Ferroviji [Aġenzija Ferrovjarja Ewropea] (2) jeħtieġ li l-Aġenzija Ferrovjarja Ewropea (minn hawn ‘il quddiem, “l-Aġenzija”) għandha tiżgura illi l-ispeċifikazzjonijiet tekniċi għall-interoperabbiltà (minn hawn ‘il quddiem, “TSIs”) jiġu addattati għall-progress tekniku u x-xejriet tas-suq u għall-ħtiġijiet soċjali u illi tipproponi lill-Kummissjoni l-emendi għat-TSIs li tikkunsidra meħtieġa.
               
            
                  (2)
               
               
                  Bid-Deċiżjoni C(2007) 3371 tat-13 ta' Lulju 2007, il-Kummissjoni tat mandat ta' qafas lill-Aġenzija biex twettaq ċerti attivitajiet taħt id-Direttiva tal-Kunsill 96/48/KE tat-23 ta' Lulju 1996 fuq l-interoperabbiltà tas-sistema ferrovjarja trans-Ewropea ta' veloċità għolja (3) u d-Direttiva 2001/16/KE tal-Parlament Ewropew u tal-Kunsill tad-19 ta' Marzu 2001 dwar l-interoperabbiltà tas-sistema ferrovjarja konvenzjonali trans-Ewropea (4). Skont it-termini tal-mandat ta’ qafas, l-Aġenzija ntalbet tirrevedi t-TSI adottata permezz tad-Deċiżjoni tal-Kummissjoni 2006/920/KE tal-11 ta' Awwissu 2006 dwar l-ispeċifikazzjoni teknika tal-interoperabbiltà relatata mas-subsistema ta' “l-Operat u l-Immaniġġjar tat-Traffiku” tas-sistema ferrovjarja konvenzjonali trans-Ewropea (5).
               
            
                  (3)
               
               
                  Fis-17 ta' Lulju 2009, l-Aġenzija ppubblikat erba' rakkomandazzjonijiet dwar, rispettivament, ir-regoli operattivi tas-Sistema Ewropea tal-Ġestjoni tat-Traffiku Ferrovjarju (ERTMS) (ERA/REC/2009-02/INT), ir-reviżjoni tal-Anness P għat-TSIs relatati mal-operat u l-immaniġġjar tat-traffiku (ERA/REC/2009-03/INT), ir-reviżjoni tal-Anness T għat-TSIs relatati mal-operat u l-immaniġġjar tat-traffiku tas-sistema ferrovjarja konvenzjonali (ERA/REC/2009-04/INT), u l-konsistenza mad-Direttiva 2007/59/KE fir-rigward tal-kompetenzi tas-sewwieqa tal-ferroviji (ERA/REC/2009-05/INT). Dawn l-erba' rakkomandazzjonijiet wasslu għall-abbozz ta' Deċiżjoni tal-Kummissjoni li temenda d-Deċiżjonijiet 2006/920/KE u 2008/231/KE fir-rigward tat-TSIs relatati mal-operat u l-immaniġġjar tat-traffiku. Fil-25 ta' Frar 2010, il-Kumitat stabbilit skont l-Artikolu 29(1) tad-Direttiva 2008/57/KE iddikjara opinjoni favur dan l-abbozz ta' Deċiżjoni tal-Kummissjoni.
               
            
                  (4)
               
               
                  Ir-rakkomandazzjoni tal-Aġenzija tas-7 ta' Mejju 2010 (ERA/REC/03-2010/INT) tipproponi aktar emendi għat-TSI relatata mal-operat u l-immaniġġjar tat-traffiku tas-sistema ferrovjarja konvenzjonali, fir-rigward ta', fost l-oħrajn, il-viżibbiltà tal-ferroviji (in-naħa ta' wara tal-ferrovija), l-identifikazzjoni tal-ferroviji, u l-konsistenza mad-Direttiva 2004/49/KE tal-Parlament Ewropew u tal-Kunsill tad-29 ta' April 2004 fuq is-sigurtà tal-linji tal-ferrovija tal-Komunità u li temenda d-Direttiva tal-Kunsill 95/18/KE fuq l-għoti tal-liċenzji tal-impriżi tal-linji tal-ferrovija u d-Direttiva 2001/14/KE dwar l-allokazzjoni ta' kapaċità ta' infrastruttura tal-ferroviji u t-tqegħid ta' piżijiet għall-użu ta' infrastruttura tal-ferroviji u ċertifikazzjoni tas-sigurtà (6).
               
            
                  (5)
               
               
                  Għal raġunijiet ta' ċareżża u sempliċità, ikun xieraq li d-Deċiżjoni 2006/920/KE tiġi ssostitwita.
               
            
                  (6)
               
               
                  It-TSI stipulata fl-Anness ma għandhiex tirrikjedi l-użu ta' teknoloġiji jew soluzzjonijiet tekniċi speċifiċi għajr fejn dan ikun strettament meħtieġ għall-interoperabbiltà tas-sistema ferrovjarja trans-Ewropea konvenzjonali.
               
            
                  (7)
               
               
                  L-implimentazzjoni tat-TSI stipulata fl-Anness u ż-żamma ta' konformità mal-punti rilevanti ta' dik it-TSI għandhom jiġu ddeterminati skont pjan ta' implimentazzjoni li kull Stat Membru għandu jżomm aġġornat fir-rigward tal-linji li jkun responsabbli għalihom.
               
            
                  (8)
               
               
                  Attwalment, it-traffiku ferrovjarju jopera skont ftehimiet eżistenti ta' natura nazzjonali, bilaterali, multinazzjonali jew internazzjonali. Huwa importanti li dawk il-ftehimiet ma jtellfux il-progress kurrenti u futur lejn l-interoperabbiltà. Għal dan il-għan, jeħtieġ li l-Kummissjoni teżamina dawk il-ftehimiet biex tiddetermina jekk it-TSI stipulata fl-Anness jeħtiġilhiex tiġi riveduta skont dan.
               
            
                  (9)
               
               
                  Il-miżuri previsti f'din id-Direttiva huma skont l-opinjoni tal-Kumitat stabbilit skont l-Artikolu 29(1) tad-Direttiva 2008/57/KE,
               
            ADOTTAT DIN ID-DEĊIŻJONI:
      Artikolu 1
      1.   L-ispeċifikazzjoni teknika għall-interoperabbiltà (TSI) relatata mas-subsistema ta' “l-operat u l-immaniġġjar tat-traffiku” tas-sistema ferrovjarja konvenzjonali trans-Ewropea, kif stipulata fl-Anness, hija adottata.
      2.   It-TSI stipulata fl-Anness għal din id-Deċiżjoni għandha tkun applikabbli għas-subsistema ta' “l-operat u l-immaniġġjar tat-traffiku” kif deskritt fil-punt 2.4 tal-Anness II għad-Direttiva 2008/57/KE.
      Artikolu 2
      1.   L-Aġenzija għandha tippubblika l-elenki tal-kodiċi msemmija fil-parti 9, 10, 11, 12 u 13 tal-Appendiċi Pa fuq is-sit elettroniku tagħha.
      2.   L-Aġenzija għandha żżomm l-elenki tal-kodiċi msemmija fil-paragrafu 1 aġġornati u tinforma lill-Kummissjoni dwar l–iżvilupp tagħhom.
      Il-Kummissjoni għandha tinforma lill-Istati Membri dwar l-iżvilupp ta' dawn il-kodiċi, permezz tal-Kumitat stabbilit skont l-Artikolu 29 tad-Direttiva 2008/57/KE.
      Artikolu 3
      Sal-31 ta' Diċembru 2013, f'każ li vettura, kif definita fl-Artikolu 2(c) tad-Direttiva 2008/57/KE, tiġi mibjugħa jew mikrija għal perjodu kontinwu ta' aktar minn sitt xhur u jekk il-karatteristiċi tekniċi kollha li bihom tkun ġiet awtorizzata għat-tqegħid fis-servizz ma jinbidlux, in-Numru Ewropew tal-Vettura (minn hawn 'il quddiem, “EVN”) jista' jiġi mibdul permezz ta' reġistrazzjoni mill-ġdid tal-vettura u bl-irtirar tal-ewwel reġistrazzjoni.
      F'każ li dik ir-reġistrazzjoni mill-ġdid tkun tikkonċerna Stat Membru li jkun differenti minn dak tal-ewwel reġistrazzjoni, l-entità ta' reġistrazzjoni responsabbli għar-reġstrazzjoni mill-ġdid tal-vettura tista' titlob għal kopja tad-dokumentazzjoni relatata mar-reġistrazzjoni ta' qabel.
      F'dak li jirrigwardja il-proċeduri tal-awtorizzazzjoni, dan it-tibdil tal-EVN huwa bla preġudizzju għall-applikazzjoni tal-Artikoli 21 sa 26 tad-Direttiva 2008/57/KE.
      L-ispejjeż amministrattivi li jsiru minħabba t-tibdil tal-EVN għandhom jitħallsu mill-applikant li jitlob għat-tibdil tal-EVN.
      Artikolu 4
      Fi żmien sitt xhur mid-dħul fis-seħħ tat-TSI stipulata fl-Anness, l-Istati Membri għandhom jinnotifikaw lill-Kummissjoni dwar dawn it-tipi ta' ftehimiet, sakemm dawn il-ftehimiet ma jkunux diġà ġew notifikati fl-ambitu tad-Deċiżjoni 2006/920/KE:
      
                  (1)
               
               
                  ftehimiet nazzjonali bejn l-Istati Membri u impriżi ferrovjarji jew amministraturi tal-infrastruttura, maqbula fuq bażi permanenti jew temporanja u meħtieġa minħabba n-natura speċifika ħafna jew lokali tas-servizz ferrovjarju maħsub;
               
            
                  (2)
               
               
                  ftehimiet bilaterali jew multilaterali bejn impriżi ferrovjarji, amministraturi tal-infrastruttura jew awtoritajiet tas-sikurezza li jrendu livelli sinifikanti ta' interoperabbiltà lokali jew reġjonali;
               
            
                  (3)
               
               
                  ftehimiet internazzjonali bejn wieħed jew aktar mill-Istati Membri u talanqas pajjiż terz wieħed, jew bejn impriżi ferrovjarji jew amministraturi tal-infrastruttura tal-Istati Membri u talanqas impriża ferrovjarja waħda jew amministratur tal-infrastruttura wieħed ta' pajjiż terz, li jrendu livelli sinifikanti ta' interoperabbiltà lokali jew reġjonali.
               
            Artikolu 5
      Kull Stat Membru għandu jaġġorna l-pjan nazzjonali ta' implimentazzjoni tat-TSI li stabbilixxa skont l-Artikolu 4 tad-Deċiżjoni 2006/920/KE. It-tfassil tal-pjan ta' implimentazzjoni aġġornat għandu jsir skont il-Kapitolu 7 tal-Anness għal din id-Deċiżjoni.
      Kull Stat Membru għandu jressaq l-pjan ta' implimentazzjoni aġġornat lill-Istati Membri l-oħra u lill-Kummissjoni sa mhux aktar tard mill-31 ta' Diċembru 2012.
      Artikolu 6
      Id-Deċiżjoni tal-Kummissjoni 2006/920/KE hi revokata b'effett mill-1 ta' Jannar 2012.
      Artikolu 7
      Din id-Deċiżjoni għandha tkun applikabbli mill-1 ta’ Jannar 2012.
      Iżda,
      
                  (1)
               
               
                  L-Appendiċi P għandu jkun applikabbli mill-1 ta’ Jannar 2012 sal-31 ta’ Diċembru 2013,
               
            
                  (2)
               
               
                  L-Appendiċi Pa għandu jkun applikabbli mill-1 ta’ Jannar 2014.
               
            Artikolu 8
      Din id-Deċiżjoni hija indirizzata lill-Istati Membri.
      
         Magħmul fi Brussell, it-12 ta’ Mejju 2011.
         
            
               Għall-Kummissjoni
            
            Siim KALLAS
            
               Viċi-President
            
         
      
      
         (1)  ĠU L 191, 18.7.2008, p. 1.
      
         (2)  ĠU L 164, 30.4.2004, p. 1.
      
         (3)  ĠU L 235, 17.9.1996, p. 6.
      
         (4)  ĠU L 110, 20.4.2001, p. 1.
      
         (5)  ĠU L 359, 18.12.2006, p. 1.
      
         (6)  ĠU L 164, 30.4.2004, p. 44.
      
         ANNEX
         
            TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR INTEROPERABILITY FOR THE ‘OPERATION AND TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT’ SUBSYTEM
         
         TABLE OF CONTENTS
         
                     1.
                  
                  INTRODUCTION
                  9
               
                     1.1.
                  
                  Technical scope
                  9
               
                     1.2.
                  
                  Geographical scope
                  9
               
                     1.3.
                  
                  Content of this TSI
                  9
               
                     2.
                  
                  DESCRIPTION OF SUBSYSTEM/SCOPE
                  9
               
                     2.1.
                  
                  Subsystem
                  9
               
                     2.2.
                  
                  Scope
                  9
               
                     2.2.1.
                  
                  Staff and trains
                  9
               
                     2.2.2.
                  
                  Principles
                  10
               
                     2.2.3.
                  
                  Applicability to existing vehicles and infrastructure
                  10
               
                     3.
                  
                  ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS
                  10
               
                     3.1.
                  
                  Compliance with the essential requirements
                  10
               
                     3.2.
                  
                  Essential requirements — overview
                  11
               
                     4.
                  
                  CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SUBSYSTEM
                  15
               
                     4.1.
                  
                  Introduction
                  15
               
                     4.2.
                  
                  Functional and technical specifications of the subsystem
                  15
               
                     4.2.1.
                  
                  Specifications relating to staff
                  15
               
                     4.2.1.1.
                  
                  General requirements
                  15
               
                     4.2.1.2.
                  
                  Documentation for drivers
                  15
               
                     4.2.1.2.1.
                  
                  Driver’s Rule Book
                  15
               
                     4.2.1.2.2.
                  
                  Description of the line and the relevant line-side equipment associated with the lines worked over
                  16
               
                     4.2.1.2.2.1.
                  
                  Preparation of the Route Book
                  16
               
                     4.2.1.2.2.2.
                  
                  Modifications to information contained within the Route Book
                  17
               
                     4.2.1.2.2.3.
                  
                  Informing the driver in real time
                  17
               
                     4.2.1.2.3.
                  
                  Timetables
                  17
               
                     4.2.1.2.4.
                  
                  Rolling stock
                  17
               
                     4.2.1.3.
                  
                  Documentation for railway undertaking staff other than drivers
                  17
               
                     4.2.1.4.
                  
                  Documentation for infrastructure manager’s staff authorising train movements
                  17
               
                     4.2.1.5.
                  
                  Safety-related communications between train crew, other railway undertaking staff and staff authorising train movements
                  18
               
                     4.2.2.
                  
                  Specifications relating to trains
                  18
               
                     4.2.2.1.
                  
                  Train visibility
                  18
               
                     4.2.2.1.1.
                  
                  General requirement
                  18
               
                     4.2.2.1.2.
                  
                  Front end
                  18
               
                     4.2.2.1.3.
                  
                  Rear end
                  19
               
                     4.2.2.2.
                  
                  Train audibility
                  20
               
                     4.2.2.2.1.
                  
                  General requirement
                  20
               
                     4.2.2.2.2.
                  
                  Control
                  20
               
                     4.2.2.3.
                  
                  Vehicle identification
                  20
               
                     4.2.2.4.
                  
                  Safety of passengers and load
                  20
               
                     4.2.2.4.1.
                  
                  Safety of load
                  20
               
                     4.2.2.4.2.
                  
                  Safety of passengers
                  20
               
                     4.2.2.5.
                  
                  Train composition
                  20
               
                     4.2.2.6.
                  
                  Train braking
                  21
               
                     4.2.2.6.1.
                  
                  Minimum requirements of the braking system
                  21
               
                     4.2.2.6.2.
                  
                  Braking performance
                  21
               
                     4.2.2.7.
                  
                  Ensuring that the train is in running order
                  21
               
                     4.2.2.7.1.
                  
                  General requirement
                  21
               
                     4.2.2.7.2.
                  
                  Data required
                  21
               
                     4.2.2.8.
                  
                  Requirements for signal and lineside marker sighting
                  21
               
                     4.2.2.9.
                  
                  Driver vigilance
                  22
               
                     4.2.3.
                  
                  Specifications relating to train operations
                  22
               
                     4.2.3.1.
                  
                  Train planning
                  22
               
                     4.2.3.2.
                  
                  Identification of trains
                  22
               
                     4.2.3.2.1.
                  
                  Format of train running number
                  22
               
                     4.2.3.3.
                  
                  Train departure
                  22
               
                     4.2.3.3.1.
                  
                  Checks and tests before departure
                  22
               
                     4.2.3.3.2.
                  
                  Informing the infrastructure manager of the train's operational status
                  22
               
                     4.2.3.4.
                  
                  Traffic management
                  22
               
                     4.2.3.4.1.
                  
                  General requirements
                  22
               
                     4.2.3.4.2.
                  
                  Train reporting
                  22
               
                     4.2.3.4.2.1.
                  
                  Data required for train position reporting
                  22
               
                     4.2.3.4.2.2.
                  
                  Predicted hand over time
                  23
               
                     4.2.3.4.3.
                  
                  Dangerous goods
                  23
               
                     4.2.3.4.4.
                  
                  Operational quality
                  23
               
                     4.2.3.5.
                  
                  Data recording
                  23
               
                     4.2.3.5.1.
                  
                  Recording of supervision data outside the train
                  24
               
                     4.2.3.5.2.
                  
                  Recording of supervision data on-board the train
                  24
               
                     4.2.3.6.
                  
                  Degraded operation
                  24
               
                     4.2.3.6.1.
                  
                  Advice to other users
                  24
               
                     4.2.3.6.2.
                  
                  Advice to train drivers
                  24
               
                     4.2.3.6.3.
                  
                  Contingency arrangements
                  24
               
                     4.2.3.7.
                  
                  Managing an emergency situation
                  25
               
                     4.2.3.8.
                  
                  Aid to train crew in the event of an incident or of a major rolling stock malfunction
                  25
               
                     4.3.
                  
                  Functional and technical specifications of the interfaces
                  25
               
                     4.3.1.
                  
                  Interfaces with the infrastructure TSI
                  25
               
                     4.3.2.
                  
                  Interfaces with the control-command and signalling TSI
                  26
               
                     4.3.3.
                  
                  Interfaces with the rolling stock TSI
                  26
               
                     4.3.3.1.
                  
                  Interfaces with TSI on locomotives and passenger rolling stock TSI
                  26
               
                     4.3.3.2.
                  
                  Interfaces with TSI on freight wagons
                  26
               
                     4.3.4.
                  
                  Interfaces with the Energy TSI
                  27
               
                     4.4.
                  
                  Operating rules
                  27
               
                     4.5.
                  
                  Maintenance rules
                  27
               
                     4.6.
                  
                  Professional qualifications
                  27
               
                     4.6.1.
                  
                  Professional competency
                  27
               
                     4.6.1.1.
                  
                  Professional knowledge
                  27
               
                     4.6.1.2.
                  
                  Ability to put this knowledge into practice
                  28
               
                     4.6.2.
                  
                  Linguistic competency
                  28
               
                     4.6.2.1.
                  
                  Principles
                  28
               
                     4.6.2.2.
                  
                  Level of knowledge
                  28
               
                     4.6.3.
                  
                  Initial and ongoing assessment of staff
                  28
               
                     4.6.3.1.
                  
                  Basic elements
                  28
               
                     4.6.3.2.
                  
                  Analysis of training needs
                  29
               
                     4.6.3.2.1.
                  
                  Development of the analysis of training needs
                  29
               
                     4.6.3.2.2.
                  
                  Updating the analysis of training needs
                  29
               
                     4.6.3.2.3.
                  
                  Specific elements for train crew and auxiliary staff
                  29
               
                     4.6.3.2.3.1.
                  
                  Infrastructure knowledge
                  29
               
                     4.6.3.2.3.2.
                  
                  Knowledge of rolling stock
                  29
               
                     4.6.3.2.3.3.
                  
                  Auxiliary staff
                  30
               
                     4.7.
                  
                  Health and safety conditions
                  30
               
                     4.7.1.
                  
                  Introduction
                  30
               
                     4.7.2.
                  
                  Deleted
                  30
               
                     4.7.3.
                  
                  Deleted
                  30
               
                     4.7.4.
                  
                  Medical examinations and psychological assessments
                  30
               
                     4.7.4.1.
                  
                  Before appointment
                  30
               
                     4.7.4.1.1.
                  
                  Minimum content of the medical examination
                  30
               
                     4.7.4.1.2.
                  
                  Psychological assessment
                  30
               
                     4.7.4.2.
                  
                  After appointment
                  31
               
                     4.7.4.2.1.
                  
                  Periodicity of periodic medical examinations
                  31
               
                     4.7.4.2.2.
                  
                  Minimum content of the periodic medical examination
                  31
               
                     4.7.4.2.3.
                  
                  Additional medical examinations and/or psychological assessments
                  31
               
                     4.7.5.
                  
                  Medical requirements
                  31
               
                     4.7.5.1.
                  
                  General requirements
                  31
               
                     4.7.5.2.
                  
                  Vision requirements
                  31
               
                     4.7.5.3.
                  
                  Hearing requirements
                  32
               
                     4.8.
                  
                  Registers of infrastructure and vehicles
                  32
               
                     4.8.1.
                  
                  Infrastructure
                  32
               
                     4.8.2.
                  
                  Rolling stock
                  32
               
                     5.
                  
                  INTEROPERABILITY CONSTITUENTS
                  32
               
                     5.1.
                  
                  Definition
                  32
               
                     5.2.
                  
                  List of constituents
                  32
               
                     6.
                  
                  ASSESSMENT OF CONFORMITY AND/OR SUITABILITY FOR USE OF THE CONSTITUENTS AND VERIFICATION OF THE SUBSYSTEM
                  32
               
                     6.1.
                  
                  Interoperability constituents
                  32
               
                     6.2.
                  
                  Operation and traffic management subsystem
                  32
               
                     6.2.1.
                  
                  Principles
                  32
               
                     7.
                  
                  IMPLEMENTATION
                  33
               
                     7.1.
                  
                  Principles
                  33
               
                     7.2.
                  
                  Implementation guidelines
                  33
               
                     7.3.
                  
                  Specific cases
                  33
               
                     7.3.1.
                  
                  Introduction
                  33
               
                     7.3.2.
                  
                  List of specific cases
                  34
               
                     7.3.2.1.
                  
                  Temporary specific case (T1) Estonia, Latvia and Lithuania
                  34
               
                     7.3.2.2.
                  
                  Temporary specific case (T2) Ireland and United Kingdom
                  34
               
                     Appendix A:
                  
                  ERTMS/ETCS operating rules
                  35
               
                     Appendix B:
                  
                  Other rules enabling a coherent operation
                  36
               
                     Appendix C:
                  
                  Safety related communications methodology
                  37
               
                     Appendix D:
                  
                  Information to which the Railway Undertaking must have access in connection with the route(s) over which he intends to operate
                  47
               
                     Appendix E:
                  
                  Language and communication level
                  51
               
                     Appendix F:
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  52
               
                     Appendix G:
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  52
               
                     Appendix H:
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  52
               
                     Appendix I:
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  52
               
                     Appendix J:
                  
                  Minimum elements relevant to professional qualification for the tasks associated with ‘accompanying trains’
                  53
               
                     Appendix K:
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  55
               
                     Appendix L:
                  
                  Minimum elements relevant to professional qualification for the task of preparing trains
                  56
               
                     Appendix M:
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  58
               
                     Appendix N:
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  58
               
                     Appendix O:
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  58
               
                     Appendix P:
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  59
               
                     Appendix Pa:
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  97
               
                     Appendix Q:
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  107
               
                     Appendix R:
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  107
               
                     Appendix S:
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  107
               
                     Appendix T:
                  
                  Braking performance
                  108
               
                     Appendix U:
                  
                  List of open points
                  109
               
                     Appendix V:
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  109
               
                     Appendix W:
                  
                  Glossary
                  110
               1.   INTRODUCTION
         1.1.   Technical scope
         
         This Technical Specification for Interoperability (hereinafter referred to as ‘TSI’) concerns the ‘operation and traffic management’ subsystem shown in the list contained in point 1 of Annex II to Directive 2008/57/EC. Further information on this subsystem is provided in Chapter 2.
         1.2.   Geographical scope
         
         The geographical scope of this TSI is the trans-European conventional rail system as described in Annex I to Directive 2008/57/EC.
         1.3.   Content of this TSI
         
         In accordance with Article 5(3) of Directive 2008/57/EC, this TSI:
         
                     (a)
                  
                  
                     indicates its intended scope for the ‘operation and traffic management’ subsystem — Chapter 2;
                  
               
                     (b)
                  
                  
                     lays down essential requirements for the subsystem concerned and its interfaces vis-à-vis other subsystems — Chapter 3;
                  
               
                     (c)
                  
                  
                     establishes the functional and technical specifications to be met by the target subsystem and its interfaces vis-à-vis other subsystems. If necessary, these specifications may vary according to the use of the subsystem, for example according to the categories of line, hub and/or rolling stock provided for in Annex I to Directive 2008/57/EC — Chapter 4;
                  
               
                     (d)
                  
                  
                     determines the interoperability constituents and interfaces covered by European specifications, including European standards, which are necessary to achieve interoperability within the trans-European conventional rail system — Chapter 5;
                  
               
                     (e)
                  
                  
                     states, in each case under consideration, which procedures are to be used in order to assess the conformity or suitability for use of the interoperability constituents — Chapter 6;
                  
               
                     (f)
                  
                  
                     indicates the strategy for implementing the TSI. In particular, it is necessary to specify the stages to be completed and the elements that can be applied in order to make a gradual transition from the existing situation to the final situation in which compliance with the TSI must be the norm — Chapter 7;
                  
               
                     (g)
                  
                  
                     indicates, for the staff concerned, the professional qualifications and health and safety conditions at work required for the operation and maintenance of the subsystem concerned, as well as for the implementation of the TSI — Chapter 4.
                  
               Moreover, in accordance with Article 5(5) of Directive 2008/57/EC, provision may be made for specific cases for each TSI. These are indicated in Chapter 7.
         This TSI also comprises, in Chapter 4, the operating and maintenance rules specific to the scope indicated in points 1.1 and 1.2 of this Annex.
         2.   DESCRIPTION OF SUBSYSTEM/SCOPE
         2.1.   Subsystem
         
         The ‘operation and traffic management’ subsystem is described in point 2.4. of Annex II to Directive 2008/57/EC as:
         
            ‘The procedures and related equipment enabling a coherent operation of the different structural subsystems, both during normal and degraded operation, including in particular training and train driving, traffic planning and management.
            The professional qualifications which may be required for carrying out cross-border services’.
         
         2.2.   Scope
         
         This TSI applies to the ‘operation and traffic management’ subsystem of infrastructure managers (hereinafter referred to as ‘IM’) and railway undertakings (hereinafter referred to as ‘RU’) related to the operation of trains on the conventional rail TEN lines.
         The specifications laid down in the TSI on operation and traffic management may be used as a reference document for the operation of trains even if they are not covered by the scope of this TSI.
         2.2.1.   Staff and trains
         
         Points 4.6 and 4.7 apply to those staff undertaking the safety-critical tasks of accompanying a train, when this involves crossing a border(s) between states and working beyond any location(s) designated as the ‘frontier’ in the network statement of an infrastructure manager and included in his safety authorisation.
         Point 4.6.2 also applies to train drivers as stipulated by point 8 of Annex VI to Directive 2007/59/EC. A staff member will not be considered as crossing a border if the activity only involves working as far as any ‘frontier’ locations as described in the first paragraph of this point.
         For those staff undertaking the safety-critical tasks of despatching trains and authorising train movements, mutual recognition of professional qualifications and health and safety conditions between Member States will apply.
         For those staff undertaking the safety-critical tasks associated with the last preparation of a train before it is scheduled to cross a border(s) and work beyond any ‘frontier’ location(s) as described in the first paragraph of this point, point 4.6 will apply with mutual recognition between Member States of health and safety conditions. A train will not be considered to be a cross border service, if all the vehicles of the train crossing the state border cross it only to the ‘frontier’ location(s) as described in the first paragraph of this point.
         This can be summarised in the tables below:
         
            Staff involved with the working of trains that will cross-state borders and proceed beyond the frontier location
         
         
                     Task
                  
                  
                     Professional Qualifications
                  
                  
                     Medical Requirements
                  
               
                     Accompanying a Train
                  
                  
                     4.6
                  
                  
                     4.7
                  
               
                     Authorising Train movements
                  
                  
                     Mutual recognition
                  
                  
                     Mutual recognition
                  
               
                     Train Preparation
                  
                  
                     4.6
                  
                  
                     Mutual recognition
                  
               
                     Train Despatch
                  
                  
                     Mutual recognition
                  
                  
                     Mutual recognition
                  
               
            
         
            Staff working trains that do not cross state borders or do so as far as frontier locations
         
         
                     Task
                  
                  
                     Professional Qualifications
                  
                  
                     Medical Requirements
                  
               
                     Accompanying a Train
                  
                  
                     Mutual recognition
                  
                  
                     Mutual recognition
                  
               
                     Authorising Train movements
                  
                  
                     Mutual recognition
                  
                  
                     Mutual recognition
                  
               
                     Train Preparation
                  
                  
                     Mutual recognition
                  
                  
                     Mutual recognition
                  
               
                     Train Despatch
                  
                  
                     Mutual recognition
                  
                  
                     Mutual recognition
                  
               2.2.2.   Principles
         
         This TSI covers those elements (as set out in Chapter 4) of the conventional rail ‘operation and traffic management’ subsystem, where principally there are operational interfaces between RU and IM and where there is a particular benefit to interoperability.
         RU and IM must ensure that all requirements concerning rules and procedures as well as documentation are met by the establishment of the appropriate processes. The set up of these processes is a relevant part of RU’s and IM’s safety management system (hereinafter referred to as ‘SMS’) as required by Directive 2004/49/EC. The SMS itself is assessed by the relevant national safety authority (hereinafter referred to as ‘NSA’) before granting safety certificate/authorisation.
         2.2.3.   Applicability to existing vehicles and infrastructure
         
         While the majority of the requirements contained in this TSI relate to processes and procedures, a number also relate to physical elements, trains and vehicles which are important for operation.
         The design criteria for these elements are described in the TSIs covering other subsystems such as rolling stock. In the context of this TSI it is their operational function that is considered.
         3.   ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS
         3.1.   Compliance with the essential requirements
         
         In accordance with Article 4(1) of Directive 2008/57/EC, the trans-European conventional rail system, its subsystems and their interoperability constituents must meet the essential requirements set out in general terms in Annex III to the Directive.
         3.2.   Essential requirements — overview
         
         The essential requirements cover:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     safety,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     reliability and availability,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     health,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     environmental protection,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     technical compatibility.
                  
               According to Directive 2008/57/EC, the essential requirements may be generally applicable to the whole trans-European conventional rail system or be specific to each subsystem and its constituents.
         The following table summarises the correspondence between the essential requirements set out in Annex III to Directive 2008/57/EC and the present TSI.
         
                     Clause
                  
                  
                     Clause Title
                  
                  
                     Safety
                  
                  
                     Reliability & Availability
                  
                  
                     Health
                  
                  
                     Environmental protection
                  
                  
                     Technical compatibility
                  
                  
                     Essential requirements specific to operation and traffic management
                  
               
                     1.1.1
                  
                  
                     1.1.2
                  
                  
                     1.1.3
                  
                  
                     1.1.4
                  
                  
                     1.1.5
                  
                  
                     1.2
                  
                  
                     1.3.1
                  
                  
                     1.3.2
                  
                  
                     1.4.1
                  
                  
                     1.4.2
                  
                  
                     1.4.3
                  
                  
                     1.4.4
                  
                  
                     1.4.5
                  
                  
                     1.5
                  
                  
                     2.6.1
                  
                  
                     2.6.2
                  
                  
                     2.6.3
                  
               
                     4.2.1.2
                  
                  
                     Documentation for drivers
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.1.2.1
                  
                  
                     Rule book
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.1.2.2
                  
                  
                     Route book
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.1.2.2.1
                  
                  
                     Preparation of the Route book
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     4.2.1.2.2.2
                  
                  
                     Modification to Information contained within the route book
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.1.2.2.3
                  
                  
                     Informing the driver in real time
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.1.2.3
                  
                  
                     Time tables
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.1.2.4
                  
                  
                     Rolling stock
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.1.3
                  
                  
                     Documentation for railway undertaking staff other than drivers
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.1.4
                  
                  
                     Documentation for infrastructure manager’s staff authorising train movements
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     4.2.1.5
                  
                  
                     Safety-related communications between train crew, other railway undertaking staff and staff authorising train movements
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.2.1
                  
                  
                     Train visibility
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.2.1.1
                  
                  
                     General requirement
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.2.1.2
                  
                  
                     Front end
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.2.1.3
                  
                  
                     Rear end
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.2.2
                  
                  
                     Train audibility
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.2.2.1
                  
                  
                     General requirement
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.2.2.2
                  
                  
                     Control
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.2.3
                  
                  
                     Vehicle identification
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.2.4
                  
                  
                     Safety of passengers and load
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     4.2.2.5
                  
                  
                     Train composition
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     4.2.2.6
                  
                  
                     Train braking
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.2.6.1
                  
                  
                     Minimum requirements of the braking system
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.2.6.2
                  
                  
                     Braking performance
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.2.7
                  
                  
                     Ensuring that the train is in running order
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.2.7.1
                  
                  
                     General requirement
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.2.7.2
                  
                  
                     Data required
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.2.8
                  
                  
                     Requirements for Signal and lineside marker sighting
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     4.2.2.9
                  
                  
                     Driver vigilance
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     4.2.3.1
                  
                  
                     Train planning
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.3.2
                  
                  
                     Identification of trains
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.3.3
                  
                  
                     Train departure
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.3.3.1
                  
                  
                     Checks and tests before departure
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.3.3.2
                  
                  
                     Informing the Infrastructure Manager of the train's operational status
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.3.4
                  
                  
                     Traffic management
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.3.4.1
                  
                  
                     General requirements
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.3.4.2
                  
                  
                     Train reporting
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.3.4.2.1
                  
                  
                     Data required for train position reporting
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.3.4.2.2
                  
                  
                     Predicted hand over time
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.3.4.3
                  
                  
                     Dangerous goods
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     4.2.3.4.4
                  
                  
                     Operational quality
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.3.5
                  
                  
                     Data recording
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     4.2.3.5.1
                  
                  
                     Recording of supervision data outside the train
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     4.2.3.5.2
                  
                  
                     Recording of supervision data on-board the train
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     4.2.3.6
                  
                  
                     Degraded operation
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.3.6.1
                  
                  
                     Advice to other users
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.3.6.2
                  
                  
                     Advice to train drivers
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     4.2.3.6.3
                  
                  
                     Contingency arrangements
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.3.7
                  
                  
                     Managing an emergency situation
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.2.3.8
                  
                  
                     Aid to train crew in the event of an incident or of a major rolling stock malfunction
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.4
                  
                  
                     ERTMS operating rules
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     4.6
                  
                  
                     Professional qualifications
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                     X
                  
               
                     4.7
                  
                  
                     Health and safety conditions
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     X
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
               4.   CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SUBSYSTEM
         4.1.   Introduction
         
         Taking into account all the relevant essential requirements, the ‘operation and traffic management’ subsystem, as described in point 2.2, covers only the elements specified in this Chapter.
         In conformity with Directive 2001/14/EC, it is the overall responsibility of the infrastructure manager to provide all the appropriate requirements which must be met by trains permitted to run on his network, taking into account the geographic particularities of individual lines and the functional or technical specifications set out in this Chapter.
         4.2.   Functional and technical specifications of the subsystem
         
         The functional and technical specifications of the ‘operation and traffic management’ subsystem comprise of the following:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     specifications relating to staff,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     specifications relating to trains,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     specifications relating to train operations.
                  
               4.2.1.   Specifications relating to staff
         
         4.2.1.1.   General requirements
         
         This point deals with staff who contributes to the operation of the subsystem by performing safety-critical tasks involving a direct interface between a railway undertaking and an infrastructure manager.
         
                     1.
                  
                  
                     Railway undertaking staff:
                     
                                 (a)
                              
                              
                                 undertaking the task of driving trains (referred to throughout this TSI as ‘driver’) and forming part of the ‘train crew’,
                              
                           
                                 (b)
                              
                              
                                 undertaking tasks on-board (other than driving) and forming part of the ‘train crew’,
                              
                           
                                 (c)
                              
                              
                                 undertaking the task of preparing trains.
                              
                           
               
                     2.
                  
                  
                     Infrastructure manager’s staff undertaking the task of authorising the movement of trains
                  
               The areas covered are:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     Documentation
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Communication
                  
               In addition, for the staff as defined in point 2.2.1., this TSI sets out requirements on:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     Qualifications (see point 4.6. and Appendix L)
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Health and safety conditions (see point 4.7)
                  
               4.2.1.2.   Documentation for drivers
         
         The railway undertaking operating the train must supply the driver with all the necessary information and documentation required to carry out his duties.
         This information must take into account the necessary elements for operation in normal, degraded and emergency situations for the routes to be worked over and the rolling stock used on those routes.
         4.2.1.2.1.   Driver’s Rule Book
         All the necessary procedures for the driver must be included in a document or a computer medium called the ‘Driver’s Rule Book’.
         The Driver's Rule Book must state the requirements for all the routes worked and the rolling stock used on those routes according to the situations of normal operation, degraded operation and in emergency situations which the driver may encounter.
         The Driver’s Rule Book must cover two distinct aspects:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     one which describes the set of common rules and procedures valid across the TEN (taking into account the contents of Appendices A, B and C),
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     another which sets out any necessary rules and procedures specific to each infrastructure manager.
                  
               It must include procedures covering, as a minimum, the following aspects:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     Staff safety and security,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Signalling and control command,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Train operation including degraded mode,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Traction and rolling stock,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Incidents and accidents.
                  
               The railway undertaking is responsible for compiling the Driver’s Rule Book.
         The railway undertaking must present the Driver's Rule Book in the same format for the entire infrastructure over which their drivers will work.
         The railway undertaking must compile the Driver’s Rule Book in such a way that the driver’s application of all operational rules is enabled.
         It must have two appendices:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     Appendix 1: Manual of communication procedures;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Appendix 2: Book of Forms.
                  
               Messages and forms must remain in the ‘operating’ language of infrastructure manager(s).
         The process for preparing and updating the Driver's Rule Book must include the following steps:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     the infrastructure manager (or the organisation responsible for the preparation of the operating rules) must provide the railway undertaking with the appropriate information in the infrastructure manager’s operating language,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     the railway undertaking must draw up the initial or updated document;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     if the language chosen by the railway undertaking for the Driver’s Rule Book is not the language in which the appropriate information was originally supplied, it is the responsibility of the railway undertaking to arrange for any necessary translation and/or provide explanatory notes in another language.
                  
               The infrastructure manager must ensure that the content of the documentation provided to the railway undertaking(s) is complete and accurate.
         The railway undertaking must ensure that the content of the Driver’s Rule Book is complete and accurate.
         4.2.1.2.2.   Description of the line and the relevant line-side equipment associated with the lines worked over
         Drivers must be provided with a description of the lines and the associated line-side equipment for the lines over which they will operate and relevant to the driving task. Such information must be set out in a single document called the ‘Route Book’ (which can either be a traditional document or computer based).
         The following is a list of information which must, as a minimum, be provided:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     the general operating characteristics,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     indication of rising and falling gradients,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     detailed line diagram.
                  
               4.2.1.2.2.1.   Preparation of the route book
         The format of the Route Book must be prepared in the same manner for all the infrastructures worked over by the trains of an individual railway undertaking.
         The railway undertaking is responsible for the competent and correct compilation of the Route book (for example, arranging for any necessary translation and/or providing explanatory notes), using the information supplied by the infrastructure manager(s).
         The following information must be included (this list is not exhaustive):
         
                     (a)
                  
                  
                     the general operating characteristics:
                     
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 type of signalling and corresponding running regime (double track, reversible working, left or right hand running, etc.),
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 type of power supply,
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 type of ground-train radio equipment.
                              
                           
               
                     (b)
                  
                  
                     indication of rising and falling gradients with their gradient values and location;
                  
               
                     (c)
                  
                  
                     detailed line diagram:
                     
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 names of stations on the line and key locations and their location;
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 tunnels, including location, name, length, specific information such as the existence of walkways and points of safe egress as well as the location of safe places where evacuation of passengers can take place
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 essential locations such as neutral sections
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 permissible speed limits for each track, including, if necessary, differential speeds relating to certain types of train,
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 the responsible infrastructure manager
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 means of communication with the traffic management/control centre in normal and degraded mode
                              
                           
               The infrastructure manager must ensure that the content of the documentation provided to the railway undertaking(s) is complete and accurate.
         The railway undertaking must ensure that the content of the Route Book is complete and accurate.
         4.2.1.2.2.2.   Modifications to information contained within the route book
         The infrastructure manager must advise the railway undertaking of any permanent or temporary modifications to information supplied in accordance with point 4.2.1.2.2.1.
         These changes must be grouped by the railway undertaking into a dedicated document or computer medium whose format must be the same for all the infrastructures worked over by the trains of an individual railway undertaking.
         The infrastructure manager must ensure that the content of the documentation provided to the railway undertaking(s) is complete and accurate.
         The railway undertaking must ensure that the content of the document grouping the modifications to information contained within the Route book is complete and accurate.
         4.2.1.2.2.3.   Informing the driver in real time
         The infrastructure manager must inform drivers of any changes to the line or relevant lineside equipment that have not been advised as modifications to information for the Route Book as set out in point 4.2.1.2.2.2.
         4.2.1.2.3.   Timetables
         The provision of train schedule information facilitates the punctual running of trains and assists in service performance.
         The railway undertaking must provide drivers with the information necessary for the normal running of the train and as a minimum include:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     the train identification;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     the train running days (if necessary);
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     the stopping points and the activities associated with them
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     other timing points;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     the arrival/departure/passing times at each of those points.
                  
               Such train running information, which must be based on information supplied by the infrastructure manager, may be provided either electronically or in a paper format.
         Presentation to the driver must be consistent across all the lines over which the railway undertaking operates.
         4.2.1.2.4.   Rolling stock
         The railway undertaking must provide the driver with all information relevant to the working of the rolling stock during degraded situations (such as trains requiring assistance). Such documentation must also focus on the specific interface with the infrastructure manager’s staff in these cases.
         4.2.1.3.   Documentation for railway undertaking staff other than drivers
         
         The railway undertaking must provide all members of his staff (whether on train or otherwise) who undertake safety-critical tasks involving a direct interface with the staff, equipment or systems of the infrastructure manager with the rules, procedures, rolling stock and route specific information it deems appropriate to such tasks. Such information shall be applicable in both normal and degraded operation.
         For staff on-board trains, the structure, format, content and process for preparation and updating of such information must be based on the specification set out in Subsection 4.2.1.2 of this TSI.
         4.2.1.4.   Documentation for infrastructure manager’s staff authorising train movements
         
         All the information necessary to ensure safety-related communication between staff authorising the movement of trains and train crews must be set out in:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     documents describing the Communications Principles (Appendix C);
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     the document entitled Book of forms.
                  
               The infrastructure manager must draw up these documents in his operating language.
         4.2.1.5.   Safety-related communications between train crew, other railway undertaking staff and staff authorising train movements
         
         The language used for safety-related communication between train crew, other railway undertaking staff (as defined in Appendix L) and the staff authorising train movements is the operating language (see glossary) used by the infrastructure manager on the route concerned.
         The principles for safety-related communication between train crew and staff responsible for authorising the movement of trains are to be found in Appendix C.
         In conformity with Directive 2001/14/EC, the infrastructure manager is responsible for publishing the ‘operating’ language used by his personnel in daily operational use.
         Where, however, local practice requires that a second language is also provided for, it is the responsibility of the infrastructure manager to determine the geographic boundaries for its use.
         4.2.2.   Specifications relating to trains
         
         4.2.2.1.   Train visibility
         
         4.2.2.1.1.   General requirement
         The railway undertaking must ensure that trains are fitted with means of indicating the front and rear of the train.
         4.2.2.1.2.   Front end
         The railway undertaking must ensure that an approaching train is clearly visible and recognisable as such, by the presence and layout of its lit white front-end lights.
         The forward facing front-end of the leading vehicle of a train must be fitted with three lights in an isosceles triangle, as shown below. These lights must always be lit when the train is being driven from that end.
         
            
         The front lights must optimise train detectability (for example, to track workers and those using public crossings) (marker lights), provide sufficient visibility for the train driver (illumination of the line ahead, lineside information markers/boards, etc.) (head lights) by night and during low light conditions and must not dazzle the drivers of oncoming trains.
         The spacing, the height above rails, the diameter, the intensity of the lights, the dimensions and shape of the emitted beam in both day and night time operation are defined in the rolling stock TSI(hereinafter referred to as ‘RST TSI’).
         4.2.2.1.3.   Rear end
         The railway undertaking must provide the required means of indicating the rear of a train. The rear end signal must only be exhibited on the rear of the last vehicle of the train. It must be displayed as shown below.
         
            
         4.2.2.1.3.1.   Passenger trains
         The rear end indication of a passenger train must consist of 2 steady red lights at the same height above buffer on the transversal axis.
         4.2.2.1.3.2.   Freight trains in international traffic
         The Member State must notify which of the following requirements will apply on the network of its Member State for trains that cross a border between Member States:
         Either
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     2 steady red lights, or
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     2 reflective plates of the following shape with white side triangles and red top and bottom triangle:
                     
                        
                  
               The lamps or plates must be on the same height above buffer on the transversal axis. Member States that require 2 reflective plates must also accept 2 steady red lights as train rear end indication.
         4.2.2.1.3.3.   Freight trains not crossing a border between member states
         For freight trains not crossing a border between Member States the train rear end indication is an open point (see Appendix U).
         4.2.2.2.   Train audibility
         
         4.2.2.2.1.   General requirement
         The railway undertaking must ensure that trains are fitted with an audible warning device to indicate the approach of a train.
         4.2.2.2.2.   Control
         The activation of the audible warning device must be possible from all driving positions.
         4.2.2.3.   Vehicle identification
         
         Each vehicle must have a number to uniquely identify it from any other rail vehicle. This number must be prominently displayed at least on each longitudinal side of the vehicle.
         It must also be possible to identify operational restrictions applicable to the vehicle.
         Further requirements are specified in Appendix P.
         4.2.2.4.   Safety of passengers and load
         
         4.2.2.4.1.   Safety of load
         The railway undertaking must make sure that freight vehicles are safely and securely loaded and remain so throughout the journey.
         4.2.2.4.2.   Safety of passengers
         The railway undertaking must ensure that passenger transport is undertaken safely at the departure and during the journey.
         4.2.2.5.   Train composition
         
         The railway undertaking must define the rules and procedures to be followed by his staff so as to ensure that the train is in compliance with the allocated path.
         Train composition requirements must take into account the following elements:
         
                     (a)
                  
                  
                     the vehicles
                     
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 all vehicles in the train must be in compliance with all the requirements applicable on the routes over which the train will run;
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 all vehicles on the train must be fit to run at the maximum speed at which the train is scheduled to run;
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 all vehicles on the train must be currently within their specified maintenance interval and will remain so for the duration (in terms of both time and distance) of the journey being undertaken;
                              
                           
               
                     (b)
                  
                  
                     the train
                     
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 the combination of vehicles forming a train must comply with the technical constraints of the route concerned and be within the maximum length permissible for forwarding and receiving terminals.
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 the railway undertaking is responsible for ensuring that the train is technically fit for the journey to be undertaken and remains so throughout the journey
                              
                           
               
                     (c)
                  
                  
                     the weight and axle load
                     
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 the weight of the train must be within the maximum permissible for the section of route, the strength of the couplings, the traction power and other relevant characteristics of the train. Axle load limitations must be respected.
                              
                           
               
                     (d)
                  
                  
                     the maximum speed of the train
                     
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 the maximum speed at which the train can run must take into account any restrictions on the route(s) concerned, braking performance, axle load and vehicle type.
                              
                           
               
                     (e)
                  
                  
                     the kinematic envelope
                     
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 the kinematic gauge of each vehicle (inclusive of any load) in the train must be within the maximum permissible for the section of route.
                              
                           
               Additional constraints may be required or imposed due to the type of braking regime or traction type on a particular train.
         4.2.2.6.   Train braking
         
         4.2.2.6.1.   Minimum requirements of the braking system
         All vehicles in a train must be connected to the continuous automatic braking system as defined in the RST TSI.
         The first and last vehicles (including any traction units) in any train must have the automatic brake operative.
         In the case of a train becoming accidentally divided into two parts, both sets of detached vehicles must come automatically to a stand as a result of a maximum application of the brake.
         4.2.2.6.2.   Braking performance
         The infrastructure manager must provide the railway undertaking with the actual performance required. This data shall include, if necessary, conditions of use of braking systems possibly affecting the infrastructure such as magnetic, regenerative and eddy-current brake.
         The railway undertaking is responsible for ensuring that the train has sufficient braking performance by providing braking rules for its staff to be followed.
         The rules concerning braking performance have to be managed within the infrastructure manager’s and railway undertaking’s safety management system.
         Further requirements are specified in Appendix T.
         4.2.2.7.   Ensuring that the train is in running order
         
         4.2.2.7.1.   General requirement
         The railway undertaking must define the process to ensure that all safety-related on-train equipment is in a fully functional state and that the train is safe to run.
         The railway undertaking must inform the infrastructure manager of any modification to the characteristics of the train affecting its performance or any modification that might affect the ability to accommodate the train in its allocated path.
         The infrastructure manager and the railway undertaking must define and keep up to date conditions and procedures for train running in degraded mode.
         4.2.2.7.2.   Data required
         The data required for safe and efficient operation and the process by which this data must be forwarded must comprise:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     the train identification
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     the identity of the railway undertaking responsible for the train
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     the actual length of the train
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     if a train carries passengers or animals when it is not scheduled to do so
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     any operational restrictions with an indication of the vehicle(s) concerned (gauge, speed restrictions, etc.)
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     information the infrastructure manager requires for the transport of dangerous goods.
                  
               The railway undertaking must ensure that this data is made available to the infrastructure manager(s) prior to the departure of the train.
         The railway undertaking must advise the infrastructure manager(s) if a train will not occupy its allocated path or is cancelled.
         4.2.2.8.   Requirements for signal and lineside marker sighting
         
         The driver must be able to observe signals and lineside markers, and they must be observable by the driver. The same applies for other types of lineside signs if they are safety related.
         Therefore, signals, lineside markers, signs and information boards must be designed and positioned in such a consistent way to facilitate this. Issues that must be taken into account include:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     that they are suitably sited so that train headlights allow the driver to read the information,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     suitability and intensity of lighting, where required to illuminate the information,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     where retro-reflectivity is employed, the reflective properties of the material used are in compliance with appropriate specifications and the signs are fabricated so that train headlights easily allow the driver to read the information.
                  
               Driving cabs must be designed in such a consistent way that the driver is able to easily see the information displayed to him.
         4.2.2.9.   Driver vigilance
         
         A means of onboard monitoring of driver vigilance is necessary. This shall intervene to bring the train to a stand if the driver does not react within a certain time; the time range is specified in the rolling stock TSI.
         4.2.3.   Specifications relating to train operations
         
         4.2.3.1.   Train planning
         
         In accordance with Directive 2001/14/EC the infrastructure manager must advise what data is required when a train path is requested.
         4.2.3.2.   Identification of trains
         
         Each train must be identified by a train running number. The train running number is given by the infrastructure manager when allocating a train path and must be known by the railway undertaking and all infrastructure managers operating the train. The train running number must be unique per network. Changes of train running number during a train journey should be avoided.
         4.2.3.2.1.   Format of train running number
         The train running number format is defined in the control-command and signalling TSI (hereinafter referred to as ‘CCS TSI’)
         4.2.3.3.   Train departure
         
         4.2.3.3.1.   Checks and tests before departure
         The railway undertaking must define the checks and tests to ensure that any departure is undertaken safely (e.g. doors, load, brakes).
         4.2.3.3.2.   Informing the infrastructure manager of the train's operational status
         The railway undertaking shall inform the infrastructure manager when a train is ready for access to the network.
         The railway undertaking must inform the infrastructure manager of any anomaly affecting the train or its operation having possible repercussions on the train's running prior to departure and during the journey.
         4.2.3.4.   Traffic management
         
         4.2.3.4.1.   General requirements
         Traffic management must ensure the safe, efficient and punctual operation of the railway, including effective recovery from service disruption.
         The infrastructure manager must determine procedures and means for:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     the real time management of trains,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     operational measures to maintain the highest possible performance of the infrastructure in case of delays or incidents, whether actual or anticipated, and
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     the provision of information to the railway undertaking(s) in such cases.
                  
               Any additional processes required by the railway undertaking and which affect the interface with the infrastructure manager(s) can be introduced after being agreed with the infrastructure manager.
         4.2.3.4.2.   Train reporting
         4.2.3.4.2.1.   Data required for train position reporting
         The infrastructure manager must:
         
                     (a)
                  
                  
                     provide a means of real time recording of the times at which trains depart from, arrive at or pass appropriate pre-defined reporting points on their networks and the delta-time value;
                  
               
                     (b)
                  
                  
                     provide the specific data required in relation to train position reporting. Such information must include:
                     
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Train identification
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Identity of reporting point
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Line on which the train is running
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Scheduled time at reporting point
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Actual time at reporting point (and whether depart, arrive or pass — separate arrival and departure times must be provided in respect of intermediate reporting points at which the train calls)
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Number of minutes early or late at the reporting point
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Initial explanation of any single delay exceeding 10 minutes or as otherwise required by the performance monitoring regime
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Indication that a report for a train is overdue and the number of minutes by which it is overdue
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Former train identification(s), if any
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Train cancelled for a whole or a part of its journey.
                              
                           
               4.2.3.4.2.2.   Predicted hand over time
         The infrastructure manager must have a process, which enables an indication of the estimated number of minutes of deviation from the scheduled time a train is scheduled to be handed over from one infrastructure manager to another.
         This must include information on service disruption (description and location of problem).
         4.2.3.4.3.   Dangerous goods
         The railway undertaking must define the procedures to supervise the transport of dangerous goods.
         These procedures must include:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     the provisions as specified in Directive 2008/68/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (1)
                     
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     advice to the driver of the presence and position of dangerous goods on the train
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     information the infrastructure manager requires for transport of dangerous goods
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     determination, in conjunction with the infrastructure manager, of lines of communication and planning of specific measures in case of emergency situations involving the goods.
                  
               4.2.3.4.4.   Operational quality
         The infrastructure manager and the railway undertaking must have processes in place to monitor the efficient operation of the all the services concerned.
         Monitoring processes must be designed to analyse data and detect underlying trends, both in terms of human error and system error. The results of this analysis must be used to generate improvement actions, designed to eliminate or mitigate against events which could compromise the efficient operation of the network.
         Where such improvement actions would have network-wide benefits, involving other infrastructure managers and railway undertakings, they must, subject to commercial confidentiality, be communicated accordingly.
         Events that have significantly disrupted operations must be analysed as soon as possible by the infrastructure manager. Where appropriate, and in particular where one of their staff is concerned, the infrastructure manager must invite those railway undertaking(s) involved in the event concerned to participate in the analysis. Where the result of such analysis leads to network improvement recommendations designed to eliminate or mitigate against causes of accidents/incidents, these must be communicated to all relevant infrastructure managers and railway undertakings concerned.
         These processes shall be documented and subject to internal audit.
         4.2.3.5.   Data recording
         
         Data pertaining to the running of a train must be recorded and retained for the purposes of:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     Supporting systematic safety monitoring as a means of preventing incidents and accidents.
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Identifying driver, train and infrastructure performance in the period leading up to and (if appropriate) immediately after an incident or accident, to enable the identification of causes related to train driving or train equipment, and supporting the case for new or changed measures to prevent recurrence.
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     To record information relating to the performance of both the locomotive/traction unit and the person driving.
                  
               It must be possible to match recorded data to:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     the date and time of the recording
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     the precise geographic location of the event being recorded (distance in kilometres from a recognisable location)
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     the train identification
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     the identity of the driver
                  
               Requirements with regard to storage, periodic evaluation of and access to this data are specified in relevant national laws of the Member State:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     in which the railway undertaking is licensed (with regard to on-board recorded data), or
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     of the Member State in which the infrastructure is located (with regard to data recorded outside the train).
                  
               4.2.3.5.1.   Recording of supervision data outside the train
         As a minimum, the infrastructure manager must record the following data:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     the failure of line-side equipment associated with the movement of trains (signalling, points etc.);
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     the detection of an overheating axle bearing, where this equipment is provided;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     communication between the train driver and infrastructure manager’s staff authorising train movements.
                  
               4.2.3.5.2.   Recording of supervision data on-board the train
         As a minimum, the railway undertaking must record the following data:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     the passing of signals at danger or ‘end of movement authority’ without authority
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     application of the emergency brake
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     speed at which the train is running
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     any isolation or overriding of the on-board train control (signalling) systems
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     operation of the audible warning device (horn)
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     operation of door controls (release, closure)
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     detection by on-board hot axle box detectors, if fitted
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     identity of the cab for which data is being recorded to be checked.
                  
               4.2.3.6.   Degraded operation
         
         4.2.3.6.1.   Advice to other users
         The infrastructure manager in conjunction with the railway undertaking(s) must define a process to immediately inform each other of any situation that impedes the safety, performance and/or the availability of the rail network or rolling stock.
         4.2.3.6.2.   Advice to train drivers
         In any case of degraded operation associated with the infrastructure manager’s area of responsibility, the infrastructure manager must give formal instructions to drivers on what measures to take in order to safely overcome the degradation.
         4.2.3.6.3.   Contingency arrangements
         The infrastructure manager in conjunction with all the railway undertakings operating over his infrastructure, and neighbouring infrastructure managers as appropriate, must define, publish and make available appropriate contingency measures and assign responsibilities based on the requirement to reduce any negative impact as a result of degraded operation.
         The planning requirements and the response to such events must be proportional to the nature and potential severity of the degradation.
         These measures, which must as a minimum include plans for recovering the network to ‘normal’ status, may also address:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     rolling stock failures (for example, those which could result in substantial traffic disruption, the procedures for rescuing failed trains);
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     infrastructure failures (for example, when there has been a failure of the electric power or the conditions under which trains may be diverted from the booked route);
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     extreme weather conditions.
                  
               The infrastructure manager must establish and keep updated contact information for key infrastructure manager and railway undertaking staff who may be contacted in the event of service disruption leading to degraded operation. This information must include contact details both during and outside office hours.
         The railway undertaking must submit this information to the infrastructure manager and advise the infrastructure manager of any changes to these contact details.
         The infrastructure manager must advise all the railway undertaking(s) of any changes to his details.
         4.2.3.7.   Managing an emergency situation
         
         The infrastructure manager must, in consultation with:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     all railway undertakings operating over his infrastructure, or, where appropriate, representative bodies of railway undertakings operating over his infrastructure,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     neighbouring infrastructure managers, as appropriate,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     local authorities, representative bodies of the emergency services (including fire fighting and rescue) at either local or national level, as appropriate.
                  
               define, publish and make available appropriate measures to manage emergency situations and restore the line to normal operation.
         Such measures shall typically cover:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     collisions,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     fires on train,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     evacuation of trains,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     accidents in tunnels,
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     incidents involving dangerous goods
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     derailments
                  
               The railway undertaking must provide the infrastructure manager with any specific information in respect to these circumstances, especially in respect to the recovery or re-railing of their trains.
         Additionally, the railway undertaking must have processes to inform passengers about onboard emergency and safety procedures.
         4.2.3.8.   Aid to train crew in the event of an incident or of a major rolling stock malfunction
         
         The railway undertaking must define appropriate procedures to assist the train crew in degraded situations in order to avoid or decrease delays caused by technical or other failures of the rolling stock (for example, lines of communication, measures to be taken in case of evacuation of a train).
         4.3.   Functional and technical specifications of the interfaces
         
         In the light of the essential requirements set out in Chapter 3, the functional and technical specifications of the interfaces are as follows:
         4.3.1.   Interfaces with the infrastructure TSI
         
         
                     Reference conventional rail operation TSI
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     Reference conventional rail infrastructure TSI
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     Parameter
                  
                  
                     Point
                  
                  
                     Parameter
                  
                  
                     Point
                  
               
                     Braking performance
                  
                  
                     4.2.2.6.2
                  
                  
                     Longitudinal track resistance
                  
                  
                     4.2.7.2
                  
               
                     Modifications to information contained in the route book
                  
                  
                     4.1.2.2.2
                  
                  
                     Operating rules
                  
                  
                     4.4
                  
               
                     Degraded operation
                  
                  
                     4.2.3.6
                  
               4.3.2.   Interfaces with the control-command and signalling TSI
         
         
                     Reference conventional rail operation TSI
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     Reference conventional rail CCS draft TSI
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     Parameter
                  
                  
                     Point
                  
                  
                     Parameter
                  
                  
                     Point
                  
               
                     Rule book
                  
                  
                     4.2.1.2.1
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     Operating rules
                  
                  
                     4.4
                  
                  
                     Operating rules
                  
                  
                     4.4
                  
               
                     Signal and lineside marker sighting
                  
                  
                     4.2.2.8
                  
                  
                     Visibility of track-side control-command objects
                  
                  
                     4.2.16
                  
               
                     Braking performance
                  
                  
                     4.2.2.6
                  
                  
                     Train braking performance and characteristics
                  
                  
                     4.3.2.3
                  
               
                     Rule Book
                  
                  
                     4.2.1.2.1
                  
                  
                     Use of sanding equipment
                  
                  
                     4.2.10
                  
               
                     Train running number
                  
                  
                     4.2.3.2.1
                  
                  
                     ETCS DMI
                  
                  
                     4.2.12
                  
               
                      
                  
                  
                     GSM-R DMI
                  
                  
                     4.2.13
                  
               
                     Data recording onboard
                  
                  
                     4.2.3.5
                  
                  
                     Interface to data recording for regulatory purposes
                  
                  
                     4.2.15
                  
               4.3.3.   Interfaces with the rolling stock TSI
         
         4.3.3.1.   Interfaces with TSI on locomotives and passenger rolling stock TSI
         
         
                     Reference conventional rail operation TSI
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     Reference conventional rail locom. and pass. TSI
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     Parameter
                  
                  
                     Point
                  
                  
                     Parameter
                  
                  
                     Point
                  
               
                     Contingency arrangements
                  
                  
                     4.2.3.6.3
                  
                  
                     Rescue coupling
                  
                  
                     4.2.2.2.4
                  
               
                     Train composition
                  
                  
                     4.2.2.5
                  
                  
                     Interface with infrastructure: axle load parameter
                  
                  
                     4.2.3.2
                  
               
                     Minimum requirements of the braking system
                  
                  
                     4.2.2.6.1
                  
                  
                     Braking performance
                  
                  
                     4.2.4.5
                  
               
                     Train visibility
                  
                  
                     4.2.2.1
                  
                  
                     External front and rear lights
                  
                  
                     4.2.7.1
                  
               
                     Train audibility
                  
                  
                     4.2.2.2
                  
                  
                     Horn
                  
                  
                     4.2.7.2
                  
               
                     Signal sighting
                  
                  
                     4.2.2.8
                  
                  
                     External visibility
                  
                  
                     4.2.9.1.3
                  
               
                     Optical characteristics of the windscreen
                  
                  
                     4.2.9.2.2
                  
               
                     Internal lighting
                  
                  
                     4.2.9.1.8
                  
               
                     Driver vigilance
                  
                  
                     4.2.2.9
                  
                  
                     Driver's activity control function
                  
                  
                     4.2.9.3.1
                  
               
                     Data recording
                  
                  
                     4.2.3.5.2
                  
                  
                     Recording device
                  
                  
                     4.2.9.5
                  
               4.3.3.2.   Interfaces with TSI on freight wagons
         
         
                     Reference conventional rail operation TSI
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     Reference conventional freight wagon draft TSI
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     Parameter
                  
                  
                     Point
                  
                  
                     Parameter
                  
                  
                     Point
                  
               
                     Rear end
                  
                  
                     4.2.2.1.3.2
                  
                  
                     Attachment devices for rear-end signal
                  
                  
                     4.2.6.3
                  
               
                     Rear end
                  
                  
                     4.2.2.1.3.2
                  
                  
                     Rear-end signal
                  
                  
                     Annex E
                  
               
                     Train composition
                  
                  
                     4.2.2.5
                  
                  
                     Gauging
                  
                  
                     4.2.3.1
                  
               
                     Train composition
                  
                  
                     4.2.2.5
                  
                  
                     Axle load parameter
                  
                  
                     4.2.3.3.2
                  
               
                     Contingency arrangements
                  
                  
                     4.2.3.6.3
                  
                  
                     Lifting and jacking
                  
                  
                     4.2.2.2
                  
               
                     Train braking
                  
                  
                     4.2.2.6
                  
                  
                     Brake
                  
                  
                     4.2.4
                  
               4.3.4.   Interfaces with the Energy TSI
         
         
                     Reference conventional rail operation TSI
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                     Reference conventional rail energy TSI
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     Parameter
                  
                  
                     Point
                  
                  
                     Parameter
                  
                  
                     Point
                  
               
                     Description of the line and the relevant line side equipment associated with the lines worked over
                  
                  
                     4.2.1.2.2
                  
                  
                     Management of power supply
                  
                  
                     4.4.2
                  
               
                     Informing the driver in real time
                  
                  
                     4.2.1.2.2.3
                  
                  
                      
                  
                  
                      
                  
               
                     Modifications to information contained within the route book
                  
                  
                     4.2.1.2.2.2
                  
                  
                     Execution of works
                  
                  
                     4.4.3
                  
               4.4.   Operating rules
         
         The rules and procedures enabling coherent operation of new and different structural subsystems intended to be used in the TEN, and in particular those that are linked directly to the operation of a new train control and signalling system, must be identical where identical situations exist.
         To this end, the operating rules for the European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS/ETCS) and for ERTMS/GSM-R radio system are specified in Appendix A.
         Other operating rules, which are able to be standardised across the TEN, will be specified in Appendix B.
         4.5.   Maintenance rules
         
         Not applicable
         4.6.   Professional qualifications
         
         In accordance with point 2.2.1 of this TSI, this point deals with professional and linguistic competency and the assessment process required for staff to attain this competency.
         4.6.1.   Professional competency
         
         Staff (including contractors) of the railway undertaking and the infrastructure manager must have attained appropriate professional competency to undertake all necessary safety-related duties in normal, degraded and emergency situations. Such competency comprises professional knowledge and the ability to put this knowledge into practice.
         Minimum elements relevant to professional qualification for individual tasks can be found in Appendices J and L.
         4.6.1.1.   Professional knowledge
         
         Taking these appendices into account and dependant on the duties of the individual staff member concerned, the knowledge required will comprise the following:
         
                     (a)
                  
                  
                     general railway operation with particular emphasis on safety-critical activity:
                     
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 principles of operation of their organisation’s safety management system;
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 the roles and responsibilities of the key players involved in interoperable operations;
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 appreciation of hazards, especially in relation to the risks involving railway operation and electric traction supply.
                              
                           
               
                     (b)
                  
                  
                     appropriate knowledge of safety-related tasks in respect to procedures and interfaces for:
                     
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 lines and line-side equipment;
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 rolling stock;
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 the environment.
                              
                           
               4.6.1.2.   Ability to put this knowledge into practice
         
         The ability to apply this knowledge in routine, degraded and emergency situations will require staff to be fully acquainted with:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     the method and principles for applying these rules and procedures
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     the process for the use of line-side equipment and rolling stock, as well as any specific safety-related equipment
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     the principles of the safety management system to avoid the introduction of any undue risk to people and process.
                  
               Staff must also possess a general ability to adapt to the different circumstances an individual may encounter.
         Railway undertakings and infrastructure managers are required to establish a competence management system to ensure that the individual competency of their staff involved is assessed and maintained. Additionally, training must be provided, as necessary, to ensure that knowledge and skills are kept up to date, especially in relation to weaknesses or deficiencies in system or individual performance.
         4.6.2.   Linguistic competency
         
         4.6.2.1.   Principles
         
         The infrastructure manager and the railway undertaking are required to ensure that their relevant personnel are competent in the use of the communication protocols and principles set out in this TSI.
         Where the operating language used by the infrastructure manager differs from that habitually used by the railway undertaking’s personnel, such linguistic and communications training must form a critical part of the railway undertaking’s overall competency management system.
         Railway undertaking staff whose duties require them to communicate with staff of the infrastructure manager in connection with safety-critical matters, whether in routine, degraded or emergency situations, must have a sufficient level of knowledge in the operating language of the infrastructure manager.
         4.6.2.2.   Level of knowledge
         
         The level of knowledge in the infrastructure manager’s language must be sufficient for safety purposes.
         
                     (a)
                  
                  
                     As a minimum this must comprise of the driver being able to:
                     
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 send and understand all the messages specified in Appendix C to this TSI;
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 effectively communicate in routine, degraded and emergency situations;
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 complete the forms associated with the use of the Book of Forms;
                              
                           
               
                     (b)
                  
                  
                     Other members of the train crew whose duties require them to communicate with the infrastructure manager on safety-critical matters, must as a minimum, be able to send and understand information describing the train and its operational status.
                  
               Guidance on the appropriate levels of competency is defined in Appendix E. The level of knowledge for drivers must be at least level 3. The level of knowledge for staff accompanying trains must be at least level 2.
         4.6.3.   Initial and ongoing assessment of staff
         
         4.6.3.1.   Basic elements
         
         Railway undertakings and infrastructure managers are required to define the assessment process for their staff.
         It is recommended that account be taken of each of the following:
         A.   Selection of personnel
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     evaluation of individual experience and competence
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     evaluation of individual competence in the use of any required foreign language(s) or the aptitude to learn them
                  
               B.   Initial professional training
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     analysis of training needs;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     training resources
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     training of the trainers
                  
               C.   Initial assessment
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     basic conditions;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     assessment programme, including practical demonstration;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     qualification of the trainers.
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     deliver a certificate of competency.
                  
               D.   Competency retention
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     principles for retention of competency
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     methods to be followed
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     formalisation of the competency retention process.
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     assessment process.
                  
               E.   Refresher training
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     principles for ongoing training (including language)
                  
               4.6.3.2.   Analysis of training needs
         
         4.6.3.2.1.   Development of the analysis of training needs
         The railway undertaking and the infrastructure manager must undertake an analysis of training needs for their relevant staff.
         This analysis must set out both scope and complexity and take into account the risks associated with the operation of trains on the TEN, especially in relation to human capabilities and limitations (human factors) which may come about as a result of:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     differences in operating practices between infrastructure managers and the risks associated with changing between these;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     the differences between tasks, operating procedures and communication protocols;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     any difference in the ‘operating’ language used by the infrastructure manager’s personnel;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     local operating instructions which may include special procedures or particular equipment to be applied in certain cases, for example a specific tunnel.
                  
               Guidance on the elements that should be considered can be found in the appendices referred to in point 4.6.1. As appropriate, elements of the training for staff must be put in places which take these into account.
         It is possible that due to the type of operation envisaged by a railway undertaking or the nature of the network being run by an infrastructure manager, some of the elements in the appendices referred to in point 4.6.1. will not be appropriate. The analysis of training needs must document those not deemed appropriate and the reasons why.
         4.6.3.2.2.   Updating the analysis of training needs
         The railway undertaking and the infrastructure manager must define a process for reviewing and updating their individual training needs, taking into account issues such as previous audits, system feedback and known changes to rules and procedures, infrastructure and technology.
         4.6.3.2.3.   Specific elements for train crew and auxiliary staff
         4.6.3.2.3.1.   Infrastructure knowledge
         The railway undertaking must ensure that the on board staff has appropriate knowledge for the relevant infrastructure.
         The railway undertaking must define the process by which knowledge of on board staff of the routes worked over is acquired and maintained. This process must be:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     based upon the route information provided by the infrastructure manager and
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     in accordance with the process described in point 4.2.1.
                  
               4.6.3.2.3.2.   Knowledge of rolling stock
         The railway undertaking must define the process for the acquisition and retention of traction and rolling stock knowledge by its train crew.
         4.6.3.2.3.3.   Auxiliary staff
         The railway undertaking must make sure that the auxiliary staff (for example, catering and cleaning) not forming part of the ‘train crew’ is, in addition to their basic instruction, trained to respond to the instructions of the fully trained members of the ‘train crew’.
         4.7.   Health and safety conditions
         
         4.7.1.   Introduction
         
         Staff specified in point 4.2.1 as staff performing safety-critical tasks in accordance with point 2.2 must have appropriate fitness to ensure that overall operational and safety standards are met.
         Railway undertakings and infrastructure managers must set up and document the process they put in place to meet the medical, psychological and health requirements for their staff within their safety management system.
         Medical examinations as specified in point 4.7.4 and any associated decisions on the individual fitness of staff must be conducted by a recognised occupational doctor.
         Staff must not perform safety-critical work whilst vigilance is impaired by substances such as alcohol, drugs or psychotropic medication. Therefore, the railway undertaking and the infrastructure manager must have in place procedures to control the risk that staff attend for work under the influence of such substances, or consume such substances at work.
         National rules of the Member State where a train service is operated apply with regard to defined limits of the above mentioned substances.
         4.7.2.   Deleted
         
         4.7.3.   Deleted
         
         4.7.4.   Medical examinations and psychological assessments
         
         4.7.4.1.   Before appointment
         
         4.7.4.1.1.   Minimum content of the medical examination
         Medical examinations must cover:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     General medical examination;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Examinations of sensory functions (vision, hearing, colour perception);
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Urine or blood analysis for the detection of diabetes mellitus and other conditions as indicated by the clinical examination;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Screening for drugs of abuse.
                  
               4.7.4.1.2.   Psychological assessment
         The aim of the psychological assessment is to support the railway undertaking in the appointment and management of staff who have the cognitive, psychomotor, behavioural and personality capabilities to perform their roles safely.
         In determining the content of the psychological assessment the psychologist must, as a minimum, take the following criteria into account relevant to the requirements of each safety function:
         
                     (a)
                  
                  
                     Cognitive:
                     
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Attention and concentration
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Memory
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Perceptive capability
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Reasoning
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Communication
                              
                           
               
                     (b)
                  
                  
                     Psychomotor:
                     
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Speed of reaction
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Gestured co-ordination
                              
                           
               
                     (c)
                  
                  
                     Behavioural and personality
                     
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Emotional self control
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Behavioural reliability
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Autonomy
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 Conscientiousness
                              
                           
               If the psychologist omits any of those elements, the respective decision must be justified and documented.
         4.7.4.2.   After appointment
         
         4.7.4.2.1.   Periodicity of periodic medical examinations
         At least one systematic medical examination must be performed:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     Every 5 years for staff aged up to 40;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Every 3 years for staff aged between 41 and 62;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Every year for staff aged over 62.
                  
               Increased periodicity of examination must be set by the occupational doctor if the state of health of the member of the staff requires so.
         4.7.4.2.2.   Minimum content of the periodic medical examination
         If the worker complies with the criteria required at the examination, which is carried out before practising an occupation, the periodic specialised examinations must include as a minimum:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     General medical examination;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Examination of sensory functions (vision, hearing, colour perception);
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Urine or blood analysis for the detection of diabetes mellitus and other conditions as indicated by the clinical examination;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Screening for drugs of abuse where clinically indicated.
                  
               4.7.4.2.3.   Additional medical examinations and/or psychological assessments
         Besides the periodic medical examination, an additional specific medical examination and/or psychological assessment must be performed where there is reasonable ground for doubting the medical or psychological fitness of a member of staff or reasonable suspicion of use of drugs of abuse or abuse or inappropriate use of alcohol. This would be the case especially after an incident or accident caused by human error on the part of the individual.
         The employer must request a medical examination after any sickness absence exceeding 30 days. In suitable cases such an examination can be limited to an assessment by the occupational doctor based on available medical information indicating that the employee’s fitness for work has not been affected.
         The railway undertaking and the infrastructure manager must put systems in place to ensure that such additional examinations and assessments are undertaken as appropriate.
         4.7.5.   Medical requirements
         
         4.7.5.1.   General requirements
         
         Staff must not suffer from medical conditions or take medical treatment likely to cause:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     Sudden loss of consciousness;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Impairment of awareness or concentration;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Sudden incapacity;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Impairment of balance or co-ordination;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Significant limitation of mobility.
                  
               The following vision and hearing requirements must be met:
         4.7.5.2.   Vision requirements
         
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     Aided or unaided distance visual acuity: 0,8 (right eye + left eye — measured separately); minimum of 0,3 for the worse eye.
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Maximum corrective lenses: hypermetropia + 5/myopia — 8. The occupational doctor may allow values outside this range in exceptional cases and after having sought the opinion of an eye specialist.
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Intermediate and near vision: sufficient whether aided or unaided.
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Contact lenses are allowed.
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Normal colour vision: using a recognised test, such as the Ishihara, completed by another recognised test if required.
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Vision field: normal (absence of any abnormality affecting the task to be performed)
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Vision for both eyes: present
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Binocular vision: present
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Contrast sensitivity: good
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Absence of progressive eye disease
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     Lens implants, keratotomies and keratectomies are allowed only on condition that they are checked on a yearly basis or according to a periodicity set by the occupational doctor.
                  
               4.7.5.3.   Hearing requirements
         
         Sufficient hearing confirmed with tone audiogram, that is:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     Hearing good enough to keep a phone conversation going and be able to hear alert tones and radio messages.
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     The following values given for information should be taken as guidelines:
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     The hearing deficiency must not be higher than 40 dB at 500 and 1 000 Hz;
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     The hearing deficiency must not be higher than 45 dB at 2 000 Hz for the ear with the worst air conduction of sound.
                  
               4.8.   Registers of infrastructure and vehicles
         
         Due to the characteristics of the registers of infrastructure and vehicles, as defined in Articles 33, 34 and 35 of Directive 2008/57/EC, these registers are not suitable for the particular requirements of the operation and traffic management subsystem. Therefore this TSI specifies nothing in respect of these registers.
         However, there is an operational requirement for certain infrastructure related data items to be made available to a railway undertaking and conversely for certain rolling stock related items to be made available to an infrastructure manager, as specified in point 4.8.1 and point 4.8.2. In both cases the data concerned must be complete and accurate.
         4.8.1.   Infrastructure
         
         The requirements for the conventional rail infrastructure related data items with regard to the operation and traffic management subsystem, and which must be made available to railway undertakings, are specified in Appendix D. The infrastructure manager is responsible for the correctness of the data.
         4.8.2.   Rolling stock
         
         The following rolling stock related data items must be available to infrastructure managers. The keeper is responsible for the correctness of the data:
         
                     —
                  
                  
                     whether the vehicle is constructed from materials which can be hazardous in case of accidents or fire (for example, asbestos)
                  
               
                     —
                  
                  
                     length over buffers.
                  
               5.   INTEROPERABILITY CONSTITUENTS
         5.1.   Definition
         
         According to Article 2(f) of Directive 2008/57/EC, ‘interoperability constituents’ means ‘any elementary component, group of components, subassembly or complete assembly of equipment incorporated or intended to be incorporated into a subsystem, upon which the interoperability of the rail system depends directly or indirectly. The concept of a “constituent” covers both tangible objects and intangible objects such as software’.
         5.2.   List of constituents
         
         In respect to the operation and traffic management subsystem, there are no interoperability constituents.
         6.   ASSESSMENT OF CONFORMITY AND/OR SUITABILITY FOR USE OF THE CONSTITUENTS AND VERIFICATION OF THE SUBSYSTEM
         6.1.   Interoperability constituents
         
         As this TSI does not yet specify any interoperability constituents, no assessment arrangements are discussed.
         6.2.   Operation and traffic management subsystem
         
         6.2.1.   Principles
         
         The operation and traffic management subsystem is a functional subsystem according to Annex II to Directive 2008/57/EC.
         In conformity with Articles 10 and 11 of Directive 2004/49/EC, railway undertakings and infrastructure managers must demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this TSI within their safety management system when applying for any new or amended safety certificate or safety authorisation.
         The common safety methods on conformity assessment require national safety authorities to set up an inspection regime to supervise and monitor the day to day compliance with the safety management system including all TSIs. It should be noted that none of the elements contained within this TSI require separate assessment by a Notified Body.
         Requirements in this TSI that refer to structural subsystems and are listed in the interfaces (point 4.3) are assessed under the relevant structural TSIs.
         7.   IMPLEMENTATION
         7.1.   Principles
         
         Implementation of this TSI and conformity with the relevant points of this TSI must be determined in accordance with an implementation plan that must be drawn up by each Member State for the lines for which they are responsible.
         This plan must take into account:
         
                     (a)
                  
                  
                     the specific human factors issues associated with operating any given line;
                  
               
                     (b)
                  
                  
                     the individual operating and safety elements of each line involved; and
                  
               
                     (c)
                  
                  
                     whether implementation of the element(s) under consideration is to be:
                     
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 for all trains on the line, or not,
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 only for certain lines,
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 applicable on all TEN lines,
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 applicable to all trains running on TEN lines
                              
                           
               
                     (d)
                  
                  
                     the relationship with implementation with the other subsystems (control-command and signalling, rolling stock, etc.).
                  
               At this time any specific exceptions that may be applicable should be taken into account and documented as part of the plan.
         The implementation plan must take into account the various levels of potential for implementation from any of the following events, namely when:
         
                     (a)
                  
                  
                     a railway undertaking or infrastructure manager commences operations,
                  
               
                     (b)
                  
                  
                     a renewal or upgrade to the existing operational systems of a railway undertaking or infrastructure manager is introduced,
                  
               
                     (c)
                  
                  
                     new or upgraded infrastructure, energy, rolling stock or command control & signalling subsystems, requiring a corresponding set of operating procedures, are put into service.
                  
               It is commonly understood that the full implementation of all elements of this TSI cannot be complete until the hardware (infrastructure, control and command, etc.) that is to be operated has been harmonised. The guidelines set out in this Chapter must therefore only be seen as an interim phase supporting migration to the target system.
         7.2.   Implementation guidelines
         
         There are three distinct elements to implementation:
         
                     (a)
                  
                  
                     Confirmation that any existing systems and processes comply with the requirements of this TSI
                  
               
                     (b)
                  
                  
                     Adaptation of any existing systems and processes to comply with the requirements of this TSI
                  
               
                     (c)
                  
                  
                     New systems and processes arising from implementation of other subsystems
                     
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 New/upgraded conventional lines (infrastructure/energy)
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 New or upgraded ETCS signalling installations, GSM-R radio installations, Hot Axle Box Detectors, … (control-command and signalling)
                              
                           
                                 —
                              
                              
                                 New rolling stock (rolling stock)
                              
                           
               7.3.   Specific cases
         
         7.3.1.   Introduction
         
         The following special provisions are permitted in the specific cases below.
         These specific cases belong to two categories:
         
                     (a)
                  
                  
                     the provisions apply either permanently (case ‘P’), or temporarily (case ‘T’).
                  
               
                     (b)
                  
                  
                     In temporary cases Member States shall conform with the relevant subsystem either by 2016 (case ‘T1’), or by 2024 (case ‘T2’).
                  
               7.3.2.   List of specific cases
         
         7.3.2.1.   Temporary specific case (T1) Estonia, Latvia and Lithuania
         
         For the implementation of point 4.2.2.1.3.2 of this TSI, trains which are operated solely on the 1 520 mm gauge network of Estonia, Latvia and Lithuania may use another specified train rear end signal.
         7.3.2.2.   Temporary specific case (T2) Ireland and United Kingdom
         
         For the implementation of 4.2.3.2.1 of this TSI, Ireland and United Kingdom are using alphanumeric number in the existing systems. The MS set out the requirements and time schedule for the transition from alphanumeric train running numbers to numeric train running numbers in the target system.
         
            (1)  OJ L 260, 30.9.2008, p. 13.
         
            Appendix A
            
               ERTMS/ETCS OPERATING RULES
            
            The operating rules for ERTMS/ETCS and ERTMS/GSM-R are specified in the Technical Document ‘ETCS and GSM-R rules and principles — Version 1’ published on the ERA website (http://www.era.europa.eu).
         
         
            Appendix B
            
               OTHER RULES ENABLING A COHERENT OPERATION
            
            A.   GENERAL
            Reserved
            B.   STAFF SAFETY AND SECURITY
            Reserved
            C.   OPERATIONAL INTERFACE WITH SIGNALLING AND COMMAND AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
            C1.   Sanding
            
            If the train is equipped with manually activated sanding device, the driver shall always be allowed to apply sand but shall avoid it wherever possible:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        in the area of points and crossings
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        during braking at speeds less than 20 km/h.
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        when at a standstill.
                     
                  The exceptions to this are
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        if there is a risk of SPAD (Signal Passed at Danger), or other serious incident and the application of sand would assist adhesion
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        when starting away or
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        when required to test the sanding equipment on the traction unit. (Testing should normally be undertaken in areas specifically designated in the Infrastructure Register).
                     
                  C2.   Activation of Hot Axle Box Detectors
            
            Reserved
            D.   TRAIN MOVEMENTS
            D1.   Normal conditions
            
            D2.   Degraded conditions
            
            Reserved
            E.   ANOMALIES, INCIDENTS AND ACCIDENTS
            Reserved
         
         
            Appendix C
            
               SAFETY RELATED COMMUNICATIONS METHODOLOGY
            
            INTRODUCTION
            This Appendix sets out the rules for safety-related ground-to-mobile and mobile-to-ground communications applicable to information transmitted or exchanged for safety-critical situations on the interoperable network and in particular to:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        define the nature and structure of the safety-related messages;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        define the methodology for voice transmission of those messages.
                     
                  This Appendix is to serve as basis:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        in order to enable the infrastructure manager to draw up the messages and books of forms. These elements shall be addressed to the railway undertaking at the same time as the rules and regulations are made available; for the Infrastructure Manager and the Railway Undertaking to draw up the documents for their staff (Books of Forms), instructions for staff authorising train movements and Appendix 1 to the Driver’s Rule Book ‘Manual of communication procedures’.
                     
                  The extent to which forms are used and their structure may vary. For some risks the use of forms will be appropriate, whilst for others it will not be appropriate.
            In the context of a given risk, the Infrastructure Manager shall decide whether the use of a form is appropriate. A form should only be used if the value of its safety and performance benefits exceeds that of any safety and performance disadvantage.
            The Infrastructure Managers must structure his communications protocol in a formalised way and in line with the following 3 categories:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        urgent (emergency) verbal messages;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        written orders;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        additional performance messages.
                     
                  To support the disciplined approach to transmission of these messages a Communications Methodology has been developed.
            1.   COMMUNICATIONS METHODOLOGY
            1.1.   Elements and principles of the methodology
            
            1.1.1.   Standard terminology to be used in the procedures
            
            1.1.1.1.   Speech transmission procedure
            
            Term transferring the opportunity to speak to the opposite party:
            
               over
            
            1.1.1.2.   Message receiving procedure
            
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        upon receiving a direct message
                        Term confirming that the sent message has been received:
                        
                           received
                        
                        Term used to have the message repeated in the event of poor reception or misunderstanding
                        
                           say again (+ speak slowly)
                        
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        upon reception of a message that has been read-back
                        Terms used to ascertain whether a read-back message exactly matches the sent message:
                        
                           correct
                        
                        or not:
                        
                           error (+ I say again)
                        
                     
                  1.1.1.3.   Communications breaking procedure
            
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        if the message has ended:
                        
                           out
                        
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        if break is temporary and does not break the connection
                        Term used to keep the other party waiting:
                        
                           wait
                        
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        if break is temporary but the connection is broken
                        Term used to tell the other party that the communication is going to be broken but will be resumed later on:
                        
                           I call again
                        
                     
                  1.1.1.4.   Cancelling a written order
            
            Term used to cancel the written order procedure underway:
            
               cancel procedure …
            If the message is then subsequently to be resumed, the procedure shall be repeated from the start.
            1.1.2.   Principles to be applied in the event of error or misunderstanding
            
            To permit the correction of possible errors during communication, the following rules shall be applied:
            1.1.2.1.   Errors
            
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        error during transmission
                        When a transmission error is discovered by the sender himself, the sender must request cancellation by sending the following procedure message:
                        
                           error (+ prepare new form …)
                        
                        or:
                        
                           error + I say again
                        
                        and then send the initial message again.
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        error during read-back
                        When the sender discovers an error whilst the message is being read back to him, the sender shall send the following procedure messages:
                        
                           error + I say again
                        
                        and send the initial message again.
                     
                  1.1.2.2.   Misunderstanding
            
            If one of the parties misunderstands a message he must ask the other party to repeat the message by using the following text:
            
               say again (+ speak slowly)
            
            1.1.3.   Word, number, time, distance, speed and date spelling code
            
            To help understanding and expressing messages in different situations, each term must be pronounced slowly and correctly by spelling out any words or names and figures likely to be misunderstood. Examples would be the identifying codes for signals or points.
            The following spelling rules shall apply:
            1.1.3.1.   Spelling out of words and letter groups
            
            The International Phonetic Alphabet shall be used.
            
                        
                           A
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Alpha
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           B
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Bravo
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           C
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Charlie
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           D
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Delta
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           E
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Echo
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           F
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Foxtrot
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           G
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Golf
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           H
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Hotel
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           I
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           India
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           J
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Juliet
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           K
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Kilo
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           L
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Lima
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           M
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Mike
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           N
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           November
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           O
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Oscar
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           P
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Papa
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           Q
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Quebec
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           R
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Romeo
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           S
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Sierra
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           T
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Tango
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           U
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Uniform
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           V
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Victor
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           W
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Whisky
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           X
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           X-ray
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           Y
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Yankee
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           Z
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Zulu
                        
                     
                  Example:
            
               Points A B= points alpha-bravo.
            
               Signal Number KX 835= signal Kilo X-Ray eight three five.
            The Infrastructure Manager may add further letters, along with a phonetic pronunciation for each letter added, if required by the alphabet of the Infrastructure Manager’s operating language(s).
            The Railway Undertaking may add further indications about pronunciation, as it deems necessary.
            1.1.3.2.   Expression of numbers
            
            Numbers shall be spoken digit by digit.
            
                        
                           0
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Zero
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           1
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           One
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           2
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Two
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           3
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Three
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           4
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Four
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           5
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Five
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           6
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Six
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           7
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Seven
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           8
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Eight
                        
                     
                  
                        
                           9
                        
                     
                     
                        
                           Nine
                        
                     
                  Example: train 2183 = train two-one-eight-three.
            Decimals shall be expressed by the word ‘point’.
            Example: 12.50 = one-two-point-five-zero
            1.1.3.3.   Expression of time
            
            The time shall be given in local time, in plain language.
            Example: 10:52 hours = ten fifty-two.
            Whilst this is the principle, it would also be acceptable, whenever necessary, for the time to be spelled out digit by digit (one zero five two hours).
            1.1.3.4.   Expression of distances and speeds
            
            Distances shall be expressed in kilometres and speeds in kilometres per hour.
            Miles may be used if that unit is used on the infrastructure concerned.
            1.1.3.5.   Expression of dates
            
            Dates shall be expressed in the usual manner.
            Example: 10 December
            1.2.   Communications structure
            
            The voice transmission of safety-related messages shall in principle comprise 2 phases as follows:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        identification and request for instructions;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        transmission of the message itself and termination of the transmission.
                     
                  The first phase may be cut back or entirely skipped for top priority safety messages.
            1.2.1.   Rules for identification and requests for instruction
            
            To enable the parties to identify one another, define the operational situation and transmit procedural instructions, the following rules shall apply:
            1.2.1.1.   Identification
            
            It is very important that at the beginning of each communication, other than very urgent top priority emergency messages, the persons who are going to communicate identify themselves. Drivers identify themselves by train running number and position. For communication between signaller and driver it is the signaller's lead responsibility to ensure that the right signaller and river are in communication. This is especially critical when communication is taking place in areas where communications boundaries overlap.
            This principle shall apply even after an interruption during transmission.
            The following messages shall be used for this purpose by the different parties.
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        by the staff authorising train movements:
                        
                                    Train …
                                    
                                       (number)
                                    
                                    this is … Signals
                                    
                                       (name)
                                    
                                 
                              
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        by the driver:
                        
                                    … Signals
                                    
                                       (name)
                                    
                                    this is train …
                                    
                                       (number)
                                    
                                 
                              
                  It should be noted that the identification may be followed by an additional information message giving the staff authoring train movements enough details of the situation to determine precisely the procedure that the driver may subsequently be required to follow.
            1.2.1.2.   Request for instructions
            
            Every application of a procedure supported by a written order must be preceded by a request for instructions.
            The following terms shall be used to request instructions:
            
               prepare procedure …
            1.2.2.   Rules for transmission of written orders and verbal messages
            
            1.2.2.1.   Top priority safety messages
            
            Due to their urgent and imperative nature, these messages:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        may be sent or received while running;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        may skip the identification part;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        shall be repeated;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        shall, as soon as possible, be followed by further information.
                     
                  1.2.2.2.   Written Orders
            
            In order to reliably send or receive (at a standstill) the procedural messages contained in the Book of Forms, the following rules shall be followed:
            1.2.2.2.1.   Message sending
            The form may be completed prior to transmitting the message so that the full text of the message can be sent in one single transmission.
            1.2.2.2.2.   Message receiving
            The receiver of the message must fill in the form contained in the Book of Forms based upon the information given by the sender.
            1.2.2.2.3.   Read-back
            All the predetermined railway messages in the Book of Forms shall be required to be read back. The read-back shall include the message shown in the grey field on the Forms, the ‘report back’ section and any additional or complementary information.
            1.2.2.2.4.   Acknowledgement of correct read-back
            Every read-back message shall be followed by an acknowledgement of conformity or non-conformity given by the sender of the message.
            
               correct
            
            or
            
               error + I say again
            
            followed by a repeat sending of the initial message
            1.2.2.2.5.   Acknowledgement
            Every message received shall be acknowledged positively or negatively as follows:
            
               received
            
            or
            
               negative, say again (+ speak slowly)
            
            1.2.2.2.6.   Traceability and verification
            A unique identification or authorisation number shall accompany all messages initiated from the ground:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        if the message concerns an action for which the driver requires a specific authorisation (e.g. passing a signal at danger, …):
                        
                                    
                                       authorisation …
                                    
                                       (number)
                                    
                                 
                              
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        in all other cases (e.g. proceeding with caution, …):
                        
                                    
                                       message …
                                    
                                       (number)
                                    
                                 
                              
                  1.2.2.2.7.   Reporting Back
            Every message comprising a request to ‘report back’ shall be followed by a ‘report’.
            1.2.2.3.   Additional messages
            
            Additional messages
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        shall be preceded by the identification procedure;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        shall be short and precise (limited wherever possible to information to be communicated and where it applies);
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        shall be read back and followed by an acknowledgement of correct read-back, or not
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        may be followed by a request for instructions or a request for further information.
                     
                  1.2.2.4.   Information messages with a variable non-predetermined content
            
            Information messages with a variable content shall be:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        preceded by the identification procedure;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        prepared before sending;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        read back and followed by an acknowledgement of correct read-back, or not.
                     
                  2.   PROCEDURAL MESSAGES
            2.1.   Nature of the messages
            
            Procedural messages are used to send operational instructions associated with appropriate situations represented in the Driver's Rule Book.
            They comprise the text of the message itself, corresponding to a situation, and a number identifying the message.
            If the message requires the recipient to report back, the text of the report is also given.
            These messages use predetermined wording prescribed by the Infrastructure Manager in his ‘operating language’ and they are presented in the form of pre-prepared forms in either paper format or in computer medium.
            2.2.   Forms
            
            Forms are a formalised medium for communicating procedural messages. These messages are generally those associated with degraded working conditions. Typical examples would be the authority for a driver to pass a signal or an ‘end of movement authority’, the requirement to run at reduced speed in a particular area, or to examine the line. There may well be other circumstances that will require the use of such messages.
            Their purpose is to:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        provide a common working document used in real-time by the staff authorising train movements and by the drivers;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        provide the driver (especially when working in an unfamiliar or rare environment) with a reminder of the procedure he will required to follow
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        enable traceability of communications.
                     
                  In order to identify the forms, a unique code word or number relating to the procedure shall be developed. This could be based on the potential frequency that a form would be used. If, of all the forms being developed, the likelihood is that the one most often used is the one for passing a signal or EOA at danger, then this one could be numbered 001 and so on.
            2.3.   Book of Forms
            
            Having identified all the forms to be used, the whole set must be collected into a document or a computer medium called the Book of Forms.
            It is a joint document that will be used by the driver and the staff authorising the movement of trains when they communicate with each other. It is important therefore that the book used by the driver and the one used by the staff authorising the movement of trains are constructed and numbered in the same manner.
            The Infrastructure Manager is responsible for drawing up the Book of Forms and the forms themselves in his ‘operating language’.
            The language to be used when transmitting the messages shall always be the ‘operating language’ of the Infrastructure Manager.
            The Book of Forms shall comprise two parts.
            The first part contains the following items:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        a reminder about the utilisation of the Book of Forms;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        an index of ground-originated Procedure Forms;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        an index of driver-originated Procedure Forms, where appropriate;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        the list of situations cross-referencing to which procedure form is to be used;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        a glossary giving the situations to which each procedure form applies;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        the code for spelling out messages (phonetic alphabet etc.).
                     
                  The second part contains the Procedure Forms themselves. These must be collected by the RU and given to the driver.
            3.   ADDITIONAL MESSAGES
            Additional messages are information messages used to inform about situations of a rare nature and for which therefore a pre-determined form is considered unnecessary, or related to train running or to the technical condition of the train or the infrastructure, either;
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        by the driver to inform the staff authorising train movements, or
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        by the staff authorising train movements to advise the driver
                     
                  To make it easier to describe the situations and construct the information messages, message guidelines, a glossary of railway terminology, a descriptive diagram of the rolling stock being employed and a descriptive statement of the infrastructure equipment (track, traction supply, etc.) may be beneficial.
            3.1.   Guideline structure for messages
            
            These messages may be structured along the following lines:
            
                        Stage in the communication flow
                     
                     
                        Message element
                     
                  
                        Reason for passing the information
                     
                     
                        
                                    
                                 
                                 
                                    for information
                                 
                              
                                    
                                 
                                 
                                    for action
                                 
                              
                  
                        Observation
                     
                     
                        
                                    
                                 
                                 
                                    There is
                                 
                              
                                    
                                 
                                 
                                    I saw
                                 
                              
                                    
                                 
                                 
                                    I had
                                 
                              
                                    
                                 
                                 
                                    I hit
                                 
                              
                  
                        Position
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    along the line
                                 
                              
                     
                        
                                    
                                 
                                 
                                    at … (station name)
                                    
                                 
                              
                                    
                                 
                                 
                                    … (characteristic point)
                                    
                                 
                              
                                    
                                 
                                 
                                    at mile post/kilometre point … (number)
                                    
                                 
                              
                  
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    in respect to my train
                                 
                              
                     
                        
                                    
                                 
                                 
                                    power car … (number)
                                    
                                 
                              
                                    
                                 
                                 
                                    trailer car … (number)
                                    
                                 
                              
                  
                        Nature
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    object
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    person
                                 
                              
                     
                        …
                        
                           (see glossary)
                        
                     
                  
                        State
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    static
                                 
                              
                     
                        
                                    
                                 
                                 
                                    standing on
                                 
                              
                                    
                                 
                                 
                                    lying on
                                 
                              
                                    
                                 
                                 
                                    fallen on
                                 
                              
                  
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    moving
                                 
                              
                     
                        
                                    
                                 
                                 
                                    walking
                                 
                              
                                    
                                 
                                 
                                    running
                                 
                              
                                    
                                 
                                 
                                    towards
                                 
                              
                  
                        Location with respect to the tracks
                        
                           
                     
                     
                        
                           
                     
                  These messages may be followed by a request for instructions.
            The elements of the messages are provided in both the language chosen by the Railway Undertaking and in the operating language(s) of the Infrastructure Managers concerned.
            3.2.   Glossary of Railway Terminology
            
            The Railway Undertaking shall produce a glossary of railway terminology for each network over which his trains operate. It shall supply the terms in regular use in the language chosen by the Railway Undertaking and in the ‘operating’ language of the Infrastructure Manager(s) whose infrastructure is worked over.
            The glossary shall be composed of two parts:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        a listing of terms by subject matter;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        a listing of the terms in alphabetical order.
                     
                  3.3.   Descriptive diagram of the rolling stock
            
            If the Railway Undertaking feels it would benefit his operation a descriptive diagram of the rolling stock used shall be prepared. It shall list the names of the various components that may be the subject of communications with the different Infrastructure Managers concerned and include the common names for the standard terms in the language chosen by the Railway Undertaking and in the ‘operating’ language of the Infrastructure Manager(s) whose infrastructure is worked over.
            3.4.   Descriptive statement of the characteristics of the infrastructure equipment (track, traction supply, etc.)
            
            If the Railway Undertaking feels it would benefit his operation a descriptive statement of the characteristics of the infrastructure equipment (track, traction supply, etc.) on the route worked over shall be prepared. This shall show the names of the various components that may be the subject of communications with the Infrastructure Manager(s) concerned. It shall include the common names for the standard terms in the language chosen by the Railway Undertaking and in the ‘operating’ language of the Infrastructure Manager(s) whose infrastructure is worked over.
            4.   TYPE AND STRUCTURE OF VERBAL MESSAGES
            4.1.   Emergency messages
            
            Emergency messages are intended to give urgent operational instructions that are directly linked with the safety of the railway.
            To avoid any risk of misunderstanding, messages must always be repeated once.
            Classified according to need, the main messages which can be sent are indicated hereafter.
            The Infrastructure Manager may, in addition, define other emergency messages according to the needs of his operation.
            Emergency messages may be followed by a Written Order (see Subsection 2).
            The type of text that goes to form Emergency messages must be included in Appendix 1 ‘Manual of communications procedures’ to the Driver’s Rule Book and in the documentation issued to staff authorising train movements.
            4.2.   Messages sent either by the ground or the driver
            
            
                     
                        (a)
                     
                     
                        Need to stop all trains:
                        The need to stop all trains must be transmitted by means of an acoustic signal; if this is not available the following phrase must be used:
                        
                           Emergency, stop all trains
                        
                        Information on location or area is, if necessary, specified in the message.
                        In addition, this message is to be quickly complemented, if possible, by the reason, the location of the emergency and the train's identification:
                        
                                    
                                       Obstruction
                                    
                                    
                                       Or Fire
                                    
                                    
                                       Or …
                                    
                                       (other reason)
                                    
                                    
                                       on line … at … (km)
                                    
                                    
                                       (name)
                                    
                                    
                                       Driver of train …
                                    
                                       (number)
                                    
                                 
                              
                  
                     
                        (b)
                     
                     
                        Need to stop a particular train:
                        
                                    
                                       Train … (on line/track)
                                    
                                    
                                       (name) (name/number)
                                    
                                 
                              In this circumstance the name or number of the line or track on which the train is running may be used to complement the message.
                     
                  4.3.   Messages issued by the driver
            
            Need to cut the traction power supply:
            
               Emergency current isolation
            
            This message is to be quickly complemented, if possible, by the reason, the location of the emergency and the train's identification:
            
                        
                           At …
                        
                           (km)
                        
                        
                           on … line/track
                        
                        
                           (name/number)
                        
                        
                           between … and …
                        
                           (station) (station)
                        
                        
                           Reason …
                        
                           Driver of train …
                        
                           (number)
                        
                     
                  In this circumstance the name or number of the line or track on which the train is running may be used to complement this message.
         
         
            Appendix D
            
               INFORMATION TO WHICH THE RAILWAY UNDERTAKING MUST HAVE ACCESS IN CONNECTION WITH THE ROUTE(S) OVER WHICH HE INTENDS TO OPERATE
            
            PART 1.   GENERIC INFORMATION REGARDING THE INFRASTRUCTURE MANAGER
            1.1.   Name (s)/Identity of Infrastructure Manager(s)
            1.2.   Country (or Countries)
            1.3.   Brief description
            1.4.   List of general operational rules and regulations (and how to obtain them)
            PART 2.   MAPS AND DIAGRAMS
            2.1.   Geographic map
            
                     
                        2.1.1.
                     
                     
                        Routes
                     
                  
                     
                        2.1.2.
                     
                     
                        Principal locations (stations, yards, junctions, freight terminals)
                     
                  2.2.   Line diagram
            Information to be included on diagrams, supplemented as necessary by text. Where a separate station/yard/depot diagram is provided then information on line diagram may be simplified
            
                     
                        2.2.1.
                     
                     
                        Indication of distance
                     
                  
                     
                        2.2.2.
                     
                     
                        Identification of running lines, loops, sidings and catch/trap points
                     
                  
                     
                        2.2.3.
                     
                     
                        Connections between running lines
                     
                  
                     
                        2.2.4.
                     
                     
                        Principal locations (stations, yards, junctions, freight terminals)
                     
                  
                     
                        2.2.5.
                     
                     
                        Location and meanings of all fixed signals
                     
                  2.3.   Station/Yard/Depot diagrams (N.B. applies only to locations available to interoperable traffic)
            Information to be identified on location specific diagrams, supplemented as necessary by text
            
                     
                        2.3.1.
                     
                     
                        Name of location
                     
                  
                     
                        2.3.2.
                     
                     
                        Location identity code
                     
                  
                     
                        2.3.3.
                     
                     
                        Type of location (passenger terminal, freight terminal, yard, depot)
                     
                  
                     
                        2.3.4.
                     
                     
                        Location and meanings of all fixed signals
                     
                  
                     
                        2.3.5.
                     
                     
                        Identification and plan of tracks, including catch/trap points
                     
                  
                     
                        2.3.6.
                     
                     
                        Identification of platforms
                     
                  
                     
                        2.3.7.
                     
                     
                        Length of platforms
                     
                  
                     
                        2.3.8.
                     
                     
                        Height of platforms
                     
                  
                     
                        2.3.9.
                     
                     
                        Identification of sidings
                     
                  
                     
                        2.3.10.
                     
                     
                        Length of sidings
                     
                  
                     
                        2.3.11.
                     
                     
                        Availability of shore electric supply
                     
                  
                     
                        2.3.12.
                     
                     
                        Distance between the edge of the platform and the centre of the track, parallel to the running surface
                     
                  
                     
                        2.3.13.
                     
                     
                        (For passenger stations) Availability of access for disabled persons
                     
                  PART 3.   SPECIFIC LINE SEGMENT INFORMATION
            3.1.   General Characteristics
            
                     
                        3.1.1.
                     
                     
                        Country
                     
                  
                     
                        3.1.2.
                     
                     
                        Line segment identification code: national code
                     
                  
                     
                        3.1.3.
                     
                     
                        Line segment extremity 1
                     
                  
                     
                        3.1.4.
                     
                     
                        Line segment extremity 2
                     
                  
                     
                        3.1.5.
                     
                     
                        Times of opening for traffic (times, days, special arrangements for holidays)
                     
                  
                     
                        3.1.6.
                     
                     
                        Lineside indications of distance (frequency, appearance and positioning)
                     
                  
                     
                        3.1.7.
                     
                     
                        Type of traffic (mixed, passenger, freight, …)
                     
                  
                     
                        3.1.8.
                     
                     
                        Maximum permissible speed(s)
                     
                  
                     
                        3.1.9.
                     
                     
                        Any other information which is necessary for safety reasons
                     
                  
                     
                        3.1.10.
                     
                     
                        Specific local operational requirements (including any special staff qualifications)
                     
                  
                     
                        3.1.11.
                     
                     
                        Special restrictions for dangerous goods
                     
                  
                     
                        3.1.12.
                     
                     
                        Special loading restrictions
                     
                  
                     
                        3.1.13.
                     
                     
                        Model of temporary works notice (and way to obtain it)
                     
                  
                     
                        3.1.14.
                     
                     
                        Indication that Line segment is congested (art. 22 of 2001/14/EC)
                     
                  3.2.   Specific Technical Characteristics
            
                     
                        3.2.1.
                     
                     
                        EC verification for Infrastructure TSI
                     
                  
                     
                        3.2.2.
                     
                     
                        Date of putting into service as an interoperable line
                     
                  
                     
                        3.2.3.
                     
                     
                        List of possible specific cases
                     
                  
                     
                        3.2.4.
                     
                     
                        List of possible specific derogations
                     
                  
                     
                        3.2.5.
                     
                     
                        Track gauge
                     
                  
                     
                        3.2.6.
                     
                     
                        Structure gauge
                     
                  
                     
                        3.2.7.
                     
                     
                        Maximum axle load
                     
                  
                     
                        3.2.8.
                     
                     
                        Maximum load per linear metre
                     
                  
                     
                        3.2.9.
                     
                     
                        Transversal track forces
                     
                  
                     
                        3.2.10.
                     
                     
                        Longitudinal track forces
                     
                  
                     
                        3.2.11.
                     
                     
                        Minimum radius of curvature
                     
                  
                     
                        3.2.12.
                     
                     
                        Gradient percentage
                     
                  
                     
                        3.2.13.
                     
                     
                        Gradient location
                     
                  
                     
                        3.2.14.
                     
                     
                        For brake system that does not use wheel-rail adhesion, accepted braking effort
                     
                  
                     
                        3.2.15.
                     
                     
                        Bridges
                     
                  
                     
                        3.2.16.
                     
                     
                        Viaducts
                     
                  
                     
                        3.2.17.
                     
                     
                        Tunnels
                     
                  
                     
                        3.2.18.
                     
                     
                        Comments
                     
                  3.3.   Energy subsystem
            
                     
                        3.3.1.
                     
                     
                        EC verification for Energy TSI
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.2.
                     
                     
                        Date of putting into service as an interoperable line
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.3.
                     
                     
                        List of possible specific cases
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.4.
                     
                     
                        List of possible specific derogations
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.5.
                     
                     
                        Type of power supply system (e.g. none, overhead, 3rd rail)
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.6.
                     
                     
                        Power supply system frequency (e.g. AC, DC)
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.7.
                     
                     
                        Minimum voltage
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.8.
                     
                     
                        Maximum voltage
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.9.
                     
                     
                        Restriction related to power consumption of specific electric traction unit(s)
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.10.
                     
                     
                        Restriction related to the position of Multiple Traction unit(s)s to comply with contact line separation (position of pantograph)
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.11.
                     
                     
                        How to obtain electrical isolation
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.12.
                     
                     
                        Contact wire height
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.13.
                     
                     
                        Permissible contact wire gradient in relation to the track and the variation of the gradient
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.14.
                     
                     
                        Type of pantographs approved
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.15.
                     
                     
                        Minimum static force
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.16.
                     
                     
                        Maximum static force
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.17.
                     
                     
                        Location of neutral sections
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.18.
                     
                     
                        Information on operation
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.19.
                     
                     
                        Lowering of pantographs
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.20.
                     
                     
                        Conditions applying with regard to regenerative braking
                     
                  
                     
                        3.3.21.
                     
                     
                        Maximum allowable train current
                     
                  3.4.   Control-Command and Signalling subsystem
            
                     
                        3.4.1.
                     
                     
                        EC verification for CCS TSI
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.2.
                     
                     
                        Date of putting into service as an interoperable line
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.3.
                     
                     
                        List of possible specific cases
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.4.
                     
                     
                        List of possible specific derogations
                     
                  
               ERTMS/ETCS
            
            
                     
                        3.4.5.
                     
                     
                        Level of application
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.6.
                     
                     
                        Optional functions installed lineside
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.7.
                     
                     
                        Optional functions required on board
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.8.
                     
                     
                        Software version number
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.9.
                     
                     
                        Placing-in-service date of this version
                     
                  
               ERTMS/GSM-R radio
            
            
                     
                        3.4.10.
                     
                     
                        Optional functions as specified in FRS
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.11.
                     
                     
                        Version number
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.12.
                     
                     
                        Placing-in-service date of this version
                     
                  
               For ERTM/ETCS level 1 with infill function
            
            
                     
                        3.4.13.
                     
                     
                        Technical implementation required for rolling stock
                     
                  
               Class B train protection, control and warning system(s)
            
            
                     
                        3.4.14.
                     
                     
                        National rules for operating class B systems (+ way to obtain them)
                     
                  
               Line system
            
            
                     
                        3.4.15.
                     
                     
                        Responsible Member State
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.16.
                     
                     
                        System name
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.17.
                     
                     
                        Software Version number
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.18.
                     
                     
                        Placing-in-service date of this version
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.19.
                     
                     
                        End of period of validity
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.20.
                     
                     
                        Need for more than one system active simultaneously
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.21.
                     
                     
                        On-board system
                     
                  
               Class B radio system
            
            
                     
                        3.4.22.
                     
                     
                        Responsible Member State
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.23.
                     
                     
                        System name
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.24.
                     
                     
                        Version number
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.25.
                     
                     
                        Placing-in-service date of this version
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.26.
                     
                     
                        End of period of validity
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.27.
                     
                     
                        Special conditions to switch over between different class B train protection, control and warning systems
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.28.
                     
                     
                        Special technical conditions required to switch over between ERTMS/ETCS and Class B Systems
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.29.
                     
                     
                        Special conditions to switch over between different radio systems
                     
                  
               Technical degraded modes of:
            
            
                     
                        3.4.30.
                     
                     
                        ERTM/ETCS
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.31.
                     
                     
                        Class B train protection, control and warning system
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.32.
                     
                     
                        ERTM/GSM-R
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.33.
                     
                     
                        Class B radio system
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.34.
                     
                     
                        Line side signalling
                     
                  
               Speed restrictions related to braking performance
            
            
                     
                        3.4.35.
                     
                     
                        ERTM/ETCS
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.36.
                     
                     
                        Class B train protection, control and warning systems
                     
                  
               National rules for functioning Class B system
            
            
                     
                        3.4.37.
                     
                     
                        National rules linked to braking performance
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.38.
                     
                     
                        Other national rules, e.g.: data corresponding with UIC leaflet 512 (8th edition of 1 January 1979 and 2 Amendments)
                     
                  
               EMC Susceptibility of infrastructure-side Control-command and signalling
            
            
                     
                        3.4.39.
                     
                     
                        Requirement to be specified according to European Standards
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.40.
                     
                     
                        Permissibility to use Eddy-current brake
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.41.
                     
                     
                        Permissibility to use magnetic brake
                     
                  
                     
                        3.4.42.
                     
                     
                        Requirements for technical solutions concerning implemented derogations
                     
                  3.5.   Traffic Operation and Management Subsystem
            
                     
                        3.5.1.
                     
                     
                        EC verification for OPE TSI
                     
                  
                     
                        3.5.2.
                     
                     
                        Date of putting into service as an interoperable line
                     
                  
                     
                        3.5.3.
                     
                     
                        List of possible specific cases
                     
                  
                     
                        3.5.4.
                     
                     
                        List of possible specific derogations
                     
                  
                     
                        3.5.5.
                     
                     
                        Language used for safety-critical communications with infrastructure manager staff
                     
                  
                     
                        3.5.6.
                     
                     
                        Special climatic conditions and associated arrangements
                     
                  
         
            Appendix E
            
               LANGUAGE AND COMMUNICATION LEVEL
            
            The oral qualification in a language can be subdivided into five levels:
            
                        Level
                     
                     
                        Description
                     
                  
                        5
                     
                     
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    can adapt the way he/she speaks to any interlocutor
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    can put forward an opinion
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    can negotiate
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    can persuade
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    can give advice
                                 
                              
                  
                        4
                     
                     
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    can cope with totally unforeseen situations
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    can make assumptions
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    can express an argued opinion
                                 
                              
                  
                        3
                     
                     
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    can cope with practical situations involving an unforeseen element
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    can describe
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    can keep a simple conversation going
                                 
                              
                  
                        2
                     
                     
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    can cope with simple practical situations
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    can ask questions
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    can answer questions
                                 
                              
                  
                        1
                     
                     
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    can talk using memorised sentences
                                 
                              
                  
         
            Appendix F
            Not used
         
         
            Appendix G
            Not used
         
         
            Appendix H
            Not used
         
         
            Appendix I
            Not used
         
         
            Appendix J
            
               MINIMUM ELEMENTS RELEVANT TO PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION FOR THE TASKS ASSOCIATED WITH “ACCOMPANYING TRAINS”
            
            1.   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
            
                        (a)
                     
                     
                        This Appendix, which must be read in conjunction with points 4.6 and 4.7 is a list of the elements that are deemed to be relevant to the task of accompanying a train on the TEN.
                     
                  
                        (b)
                     
                     
                        The expression “professional qualification”, when taken within the context of this TSI, refers to those elements that are important to ensuring that operational staff are trained and able to understand and discharge the elements of the task.
                     
                  
                        (c)
                     
                     
                        Rules and procedures apply to the task being performed and to the person carrying out the task. These tasks may be carried out by any authorised qualified person irrespective of any name, job title or grade used in rules or procedures or by the individual company.
                     
                  
                        (d)
                     
                     
                        Any authorised qualified person must carry out all rules and procedures related to the task being performed.
                     
                  2.   PROFESSIONAL KNOWLEDGE
            Any authorisation requires a successfully passed initial examination and provisions for ongoing assessment and training as described in point 4.6.
            2.1.   General professional knowledge
            
            
                        (a)
                     
                     
                        General principles of safety management within the railway system, relevant to the task, including interfaces with other subsystems
                     
                  
                        (b)
                     
                     
                        General conditions relevant to the safety of passengers or cargo and persons on or about the railway track
                     
                  
                        (c)
                     
                     
                        Conditions of health and safety at work
                     
                  
                        (d)
                     
                     
                        General principles of security of the railway system
                     
                  
                        (e)
                     
                     
                        Personal safety including when leaving the train on the running line
                     
                  2.2.   Knowledge of operational procedures and safety systems applied to the infrastructure to be used
            
            
                        (a)
                     
                     
                        Operational procedures and safety rules
                     
                  
                        (b)
                     
                     
                        Control command and signalling system
                     
                  
                        (c)
                     
                     
                        Communications principles and formalised messaging procedure including use of communication equipment
                     
                  2.3.   Knowledge of rolling stock
            
            
                        (a)
                     
                     
                        Passenger vehicle interior equipment
                     
                  
                        (b)
                     
                     
                        Repairing minor defects within the passenger areas of rolling stock, as required by the Railway Undertaking
                     
                  2.4.   Knowledge of the route
            
            
                        (a)
                     
                     
                        Operational arrangements (such as the method of train despatch) at individual locations (signalling, station equipment etc.)
                     
                  
                        (b)
                     
                     
                        Stations at which passengers may alight or join
                     
                  
                        (c)
                     
                     
                        Local operating and emergency arrangements specific to the line(s) of route
                     
                  3.   ABILITY TO PUT THE KNOWLEDGE INTO PRACTICE
            
                        (a)
                     
                     
                        Checks before departure, including brake tests and correct closure of the doors
                     
                  
                        (b)
                     
                     
                        Departure processes
                     
                  
                        (c)
                     
                     
                        Communication with passengers especially in relation to circumstances involving passenger safety
                     
                  
                        (d)
                     
                     
                        Degraded operations
                     
                  
                        (e)
                     
                     
                        Assess the potential of a defect within the passenger areas and react according to rules and procedures
                     
                  
                        (f)
                     
                     
                        Protection and warning measures as required by the rules and regulations or in assistance to the driver
                     
                  
                        (g)
                     
                     
                        Train evacuation and passenger safety especially if they are required to be on or near the line
                     
                  
                        (h)
                     
                     
                        Communicate with the Infrastructure Manager’s staff when assisting the driver or during an evacuation incident
                     
                  
                        (i)
                     
                     
                        Report any unusual occurrences concerning the operation of the train, the condition of the rolling stock and the safety of passengers. If required, these reports must be made in writing, in the language chosen by the Railway Undertaking.
                     
                  
         
            Appendix K
            Not used
         
         
            Appendix L
            
               MINIMUM ELEMENTS RELEVANT TO PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION FOR THE TASK OF PREPARING TRAINS
            
            1.   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
            This Appendix, which must be read in conjunction with point 4.6, gives a list of the elements that are deemed to be relevant to the task of preparing a train on the TEN.
            
                        (a)
                     
                     
                        The expression “professional qualification”, when taken within the context of this TSI, refers to those elements that are important to ensuring that operational staff are trained and able to understand and discharge the elements of the task.
                     
                  
                        (b)
                     
                     
                        Rules and procedures apply to the task being performed and to the person carrying out the task. These tasks may be carried out by any authorised qualified person irrespective of any name, job title or grade used in rules or procedures or by the individual company.
                     
                  
                        (c)
                     
                     
                        Any authorised qualified person must follow all rules and procedures related to the task being performed.
                     
                  2.   PROFESSIONAL KNOWLEDGE
            Any authorisation requires a successfully passed initial examination and provisions for ongoing assessment and training as described in point 4.6.
            2.1.   General professional knowledge
            
            
                        (a)
                     
                     
                        General principles of safety management within the railway system, relevant to the task, including interfaces with other subsystems
                     
                  
                        (b)
                     
                     
                        General conditions relevant to the safety of passengers and/or cargo including the carriage of dangerous goods and exceptional loads
                     
                  
                        (c)
                     
                     
                        Conditions of health and safety at work
                     
                  
                        (d)
                     
                     
                        General principles of security of the railway system
                     
                  
                        (e)
                     
                     
                        Personal safety when on or in the vicinity of rail lines
                     
                  
                        (f)
                     
                     
                        Communications principles and formalised messaging procedure including use of communication equipment
                     
                  2.2.   Knowledge of operational procedures and safety systems applied to the infrastructure to be used
            
            
                        (a)
                     
                     
                        Working of trains in normal, degraded and emergency conditions
                     
                  
                        (b)
                     
                     
                        Operational procedures at individual locations (signalling, station/depot/yard equipment) and safety rules
                     
                  
                        (c)
                     
                     
                        Local operating arrangements
                     
                  2.3.   Knowledge of train equipment
            
            
                        (a)
                     
                     
                        Purpose and use of wagon and vehicle equipment
                     
                  
                        (b)
                     
                     
                        Identification of and arranging for technical inspections
                     
                  3.   ABILITY TO PUT THE KNOWLEDGE INTO PRACTICE
            
                        (a)
                     
                     
                        Application of train composition rules, train braking rules, train loading rules etc. to ensure the train is in running order
                     
                  
                        (b)
                     
                     
                        Understanding of marking and labels on vehicles
                     
                  
                        (c)
                     
                     
                        Process for determining and making train data available
                     
                  
                        (d)
                     
                     
                        Communication with train crew
                     
                  
                        (e)
                     
                     
                        Communication with staff responsible for controlling the movement of trains
                     
                  
                        (f)
                     
                     
                        Degraded operations especially as it affects the preparation of trains
                     
                  
                        (g)
                     
                     
                        Protection and warning measures as required by the rules and regulations or local arrangements at the location in question
                     
                  
                        (h)
                     
                     
                        Actions to be taken in respect to incidents involving the carriage of dangerous goods (where relevant)
                     
                  
         
            Appendix M
            Not used
         
         
            Appendix N
            Not used
         
         
            Appendix O
            Not used
         
         
            Appendix P
            
               PART ‘0’   VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
            
            
               General remarks
            
            
                     
                        1.
                     
                     
                        This Appendix describes the number and linked marking applied in a visible manner on the vehicle to identify it uniquely in operation. It does not describe other numbers or markings eventually engraved or fixed in a permanent manner on the chassis or the main components of the vehicle during its construction.
                     
                  
                     
                        2.
                     
                     
                        The conformity of the number and linked marking with the indications described in this Appendix is not mandatory for:
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    vehicles that are only used on networks to which this TSI does not apply;
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    heritage vehicles, in a historical guise;
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    vehicles that are not normally used or transported on the networks to which this TSI applies.
                                 
                              Nevertheless, these vehicles must receive a temporary number permitting their operation.
                     
                  
               Standard number and linked abbreviations
            
            Each railway vehicle receives a number consisting of on 12 figures (called standard number) with the following structure:
            
                        Types of rolling stock
                     
                     
                        Type of vehicle and indication of the interoperability ability
                        [2 figures]
                     
                     
                        Country in which the vehicle is registered
                        [2 figures]
                     
                     
                        Technical characteristics
                        [4 figures]
                     
                     
                        Serial number
                        [3 figures]
                     
                     
                        Self-checking digit
                        [1 figure]
                     
                  
                        Wagons
                     
                     
                        00 to 09
                        10 to 19
                        20 to 29
                        30 to 39
                        40 to 49
                        80 to 89
                        
                           [details in part 6]
                        
                     
                     
                        01 to 99
                        
                           [details in part.4]
                        
                     
                     
                        0000 to 9999
                        
                           [details in part 9]
                        
                     
                     
                        001 to 999
                     
                     
                        0 to 9
                        
                           [details in part 3]
                        
                     
                  
                        Hauled passenger vehicles
                     
                     
                        50 to 59
                        60 to 69
                        70 to 79
                        
                           [details in part 7]
                        
                     
                     
                        0000 to 9999
                        
                           [details in part 10]
                        
                     
                     
                        001 to 999
                     
                  
                        Tractive rolling stock
                     
                     
                        90 to 99
                        
                           [details in part 8]
                        
                     
                     
                        0000001 to 8999999
                        
                           [the meaning of these figures is defined by the Member States, eventually by bilateral or multilateral agreement]
                        
                     
                  
                        Special vehicles
                     
                     
                        9000 to 9999
                        
                           [details in part 11]
                        
                     
                     
                        001 to 999
                     
                  In a given country, the 7 digits of technical characteristics and serial number are sufficient to identify uniquely a vehicle inside each group of wagons, hauled passenger vehicles, tractive rolling stock (1) and special vehicles (2)
            
            Alphabetical markings complete the number:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        markings linked to the interoperability ability (details in part 5);
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        abbreviation of the country in which the vehicle is registered (details in part 4);
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        keeper’s (3) abbreviation (details in part 1);
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        abbreviation of the technical characteristics (details in part 13 for hauled passenger vehicles, part 12 for wagons, part 14 for special vehicles).
                     
                  Technical characteristics, codes and abbreviations are managed by one or more bodies (hereafter designed as ‘central body’) to be proposed by ERA (European Railway Agency) as a result of activity No 15 of its work programme 2005.
            
               Allocation of number
            
            The rules for the management of the numbers will be proposed by the ERA as part of the activity No 15 of its work programme 2005.
            PART 1 —   VEHICLE KEEPER MARKING
            
               Definition of the Vehicle Keeper Marking (VKM)
            
            A Vehicle Keeper Marking (VKM) is an alphanumeric code, consisting of 2 to 5 letters (4). A VKM is inscribed on each rail vehicle, near the vehicle number. The VKM denominates the Vehicle Keeper as registered in the Rolling Stock Register.
            A VKM is unique in all countries covered by this TSI and all countries that enter into an agreement that involves the application of the system of vehicle numbering and vehicle keeper marking as described in this TSI.
            
               Format of the Vehicle Keeper Marking
            
            The VKM is representation of the full name or abbreviation of the vehicle keeper, if possible in a recognisable manner. All 26 letters of the Latina alphabet may be used. The letters in the VKM are written in capitals. Letters that do not stand for first letters of words in the keeper's name may be written in lower case. For checking uniqueness, the written name will be ignored.
            Letters may contain diacritical signs (5). Diacritical signs used by these letters are ignored for checking uniqueness.
            For vehicles of keepers that reside in a country that does not use the Latin alphabet, a translation of the VKM in its own alphabet may be applied behind the VKM separated from it by a slash-sign (‘/’). This translated VKM is disregarded for data-processing purposes.
            
               Exemptions for using a Vehicle Keeper Marking
            
            Member States may decide to apply the following exemptions.
            A VKM is not required for the vehicles whose numbering system does not follow the present Appendix (cf. part 0, point 2). Nevertheless, adequate information about the identity of the vehicle keeper has to be provided to the organisations involved in their operation over networks to which this TSI applies.
            When the full name and address information is inscribed on the vehicle, a VKM is not required for:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        vehicles of keepers with such a limited vehicle fleet that this does not warrant the use of a VKM;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        specialised vehicles for infrastructure maintenance.
                     
                  A VKM is not required for locomotives, multiple units and passenger vehicles used in national traffic only, when:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        they carry their keeper's logo and that logo contains the same and well recognisable letters as the VKM;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        they carry a well recognisable logo that has been accepted by the competent national authority as an adequate equivalent for the VKM.
                     
                  When a company logo is applied in addition to besides the application of a VKM, only the VKM is valid and the logo is disregarded.
            
               Provisions about allocation of Vehicle Keeper Markings
            
            A vehicle keeper can be issued more than one VKM, in case:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        the vehicle keeper has a formal name in more than one language;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        a vehicle keeper has good cause to distinguish between separate vehicle fleets within his organisation.
                     
                  A single VKM can be issued for a group of companies:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        that belong to single corporate structure that has appointed and mandated one organisation within this structure to handle all issues on behalf of all others;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        that has mandated a separate, single legal entity for handling all issues on their behalf, in which event the legal entity is the keeper.
                     
                  
               Register of Vehicle Keeper Markings and procedure for allocation
            
            The register of VKM is public and updated on a real time basis.
            An application for a VKM is filed with the applicant's competent national authority and forwarded to the central body. A VKM can be used only after publication by the central body.
            The holder of a VKM must inform the competent national authority when he ends the use of a VKM, and the competent national authority will forward the information to the central body. A VKM will then be revoked once the keeper has proved that the marking has been changed on all vehicles concerned. It will not be reissued for 10 years, unless it is reissued to the original holder or at his request to another holder.
            A VKM can be transferred to another holder, which is the legal successor to the original holder. A VKM stays valid when the holder changes his name to a name that does not bear resemblance to the VKM.
            The first list of VKM will be drafted using existing railway company abbreviations.
            The VKM will be applied to all new build wagons after entry into force of the relevant TSIs. Existing wagons will have to be brought in compliance with the VKM marking by 31 December 2013. In case of inconsistency between the VKM marked on the vehicle and the data registered in the NVR, the NVR registration supersedes.
            PART 2 —   INSCRIPTION OF THE NUMBER AND LINKED ALPHABETICAL MARKING ON THE BODYWORK
            
               General arrangements for external markings
            
            The capital letters and figures making up the marking inscriptions shall be at least 80 mm in height, in a sans serif font type of correspondence quality. A smaller height may only be used where there is no option but to place the marking on the sole bars.
            The marking is put not higher than 2 metres above rail level.
            
               Wagons
            
            The marking shall be inscribed on the wagon bodywork in the following manner:
            
                        23
                     
                     
                        TEN
                     
                  
                        80
                     
                     
                        
                           D-RFC
                     
                  
                        7369 553-4
                     
                  
                        Zcs
                     
                  
                        31
                     
                     
                        TEN
                     
                  
                        80
                     
                     
                        
                           D-DB
                     
                  
                        0691 235-2
                     
                  
                        Tanoos
                     
                  
                        33
                     
                     
                        TEN
                     
                  
                        84
                     
                     
                        
                           NL-ACTS
                     
                  
                        4796 100-8
                     
                  
                        Slpss
                     
                  
                        43
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        87
                     
                     
                        
                           F
                        
                     
                  
                        4273 361-3
                     
                  
                        Laeks
                     
                  
                        (In this case without VKM, full name and address information is inscribed on the vehicle)
                     
                  For wagons whose bodywork does not offer a large enough area for this type of arrangement, particularly in the case of flat wagons, the marking shall be arranged as follows:
            
                        0187
                     
                     
                        3320
                     
                     
                        644-7
                     
                  
                        TEN
                     
                     
                        F-SNCF
                     
                     
                        Ks
                     
                  When one or more index letters of national significance are inscribed on a wagon, this national marking must be shown after the international letter marking and separated from it by a hyphen.
            
               Coaches and hauled passenger stock
            
            The number shall be applied to each sidewall of the vehicle in the following manner:
            
                        
                           F-SNCF
                     
                     
                        61 87 20 – 72 021 – 7
                     
                  
                         
                     
                     
                        B10 tu
                     
                  The marking of the country in which the vehicle is registered and of the technical characteristics are printed directly in front of, behind or under the twelve digits of the vehicle number.
            In case of coaches with driver’s cabin, the number is also written inside the cabin.
            
               Locomotives, power cars and special vehicles
            
            The standard 12-digit number must be marked on each sidewall of the tractive stock used in international service in the following manner:
            91 88 0001323-0
            The standard 12-digit number is also written inside each cabin of the tractive rolling stock.
            The keeper can add, in letters of larger bigger size than the standard number, an own number marking (consisting generally of digits of the serial number supplemented by alphabetical coding) useful in operations. The place where the own number is marked is left to the choice of the keeper.
            
                        Examples
                     
                     
                        SP 42037
                     
                     
                        ES 64 F4-099
                     
                     
                        88-1323
                     
                     
                        473011
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                         
                     
                     
                        92 51 0042037-9
                     
                     
                        94 80 0189 999-6
                     
                     
                        91 88 0001323-0
                     
                     
                        92 87 473011-0
                     
                     
                        94 79 2 642 185-5
                     
                  These rules may be altered in bilateral agreements for vehicles existing when the TSI comes into force and assigned to a specific service and where if there is no risk of confusion between different stocks operating on the rail networks concerned. The exemption is valid for a period decided upon by the competent national authorities.
            The national authority can prescribe that the alphabetic country code and the VKM be recorded additional to the 12 digit vehicle number.
            PART 3 —   RULES FOR THE DETERMINATION OF THE CHECK-DIGIT (DIGIT 12)
            The check-digit is determined in the following manner:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        the digits in the even positions of the basic number (counting from the right) are taken at their own decimal value;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        the digits in the odd positions of the basic number (counting from the right) are multiplied by 2;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        the sum formed by the digits in even position and by all the digits which constitute the partial products obtained from the odd positions is then established;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        the units digit of this sum is retained;
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        the complement required to bring the units digit to 10 forms the check-digit; should this units digit be nought, then the check-digit will also be nought.
                     
                  Examples
            
                     
                        1 —
                     
                     
                        
                                    Let the basic number be
                                 
                                 
                                    3 
                                 
                                 
                                    3 
                                 
                                 
                                    8 
                                 
                                 
                                    4 
                                 
                                 
                                    4 
                                 
                                 
                                    7 
                                 
                                 
                                    9 
                                 
                                 
                                    6 
                                 
                                 
                                    1 
                                 
                                 
                                    0 
                                 
                                 
                                    0 
                                 
                              
                                    Multiplication factor
                                 
                                 
                                    2 
                                 
                                 
                                    1 
                                 
                                 
                                    2 
                                 
                                 
                                    1 
                                 
                                 
                                    2 
                                 
                                 
                                    1 
                                 
                                 
                                    2 
                                 
                                 
                                    1 
                                 
                                 
                                    2 
                                 
                                 
                                    1 
                                 
                                 
                                    2 
                                 
                              
                                     
                                 
                                 
                                    6 
                                 
                                 
                                    3 
                                 
                                 
                                    16 
                                 
                                 
                                    4 
                                 
                                 
                                    8 
                                 
                                 
                                    7 
                                 
                                 
                                    18 
                                 
                                 
                                    6 
                                 
                                 
                                    2 
                                 
                                 
                                    0 
                                 
                                 
                                    0 
                                 
                              Sum: 6 + 3 + 1 + 6 + 4 + 8 + 7 + 1 + 8 + 6 + 2 + 0 + 0 = 52
                        The units digit of this sum is 2.
                        The check-digit number will therefore be 8 and the basic number thus becomes the registration number 33 84 4796 100-8.
                     
                  
                     
                        2 —
                     
                     
                        
                                    Let the basic number be
                                 
                                 
                                    3 
                                 
                                 
                                    1 
                                 
                                 
                                    5 
                                 
                                 
                                    1 
                                 
                                 
                                    3 
                                 
                                 
                                    3 
                                 
                                 
                                    2 
                                 
                                 
                                    0 
                                 
                                 
                                    1 
                                 
                                 
                                    9 
                                 
                                 
                                    8 
                                 
                              
                                    Multiplication factor
                                 
                                 
                                    2 
                                 
                                 
                                    1 
                                 
                                 
                                    2 
                                 
                                 
                                    1 
                                 
                                 
                                    2 
                                 
                                 
                                    1 
                                 
                                 
                                    2 
                                 
                                 
                                    1 
                                 
                                 
                                    2 
                                 
                                 
                                    1 
                                 
                                 
                                    2 
                                 
                              
                                     
                                 
                                 
                                    6 
                                 
                                 
                                    1 
                                 
                                 
                                    10 
                                 
                                 
                                    1 
                                 
                                 
                                    6 
                                 
                                 
                                    3 
                                 
                                 
                                    4 
                                 
                                 
                                    0 
                                 
                                 
                                    2 
                                 
                                 
                                    9 
                                 
                                 
                                    16 
                                 
                              Sum: 6 + 1 + 1 + 0 + 1 + 6 + 3 + 4 + 0 + 2 + 9 + 1 + 6 = 40
                        The units digit of this sum is 0.
                        The check-digit number will therefore be 0 and the basic number thus becomes the registration number 31 51 3320 198-0.
                     
                  PART 4 —   CODING OF THE COUNTRIES IN WHICH THE VEHICLES ARE REGISTERED (DIGITS 3-4 AND ABBREVIATION)
            
               Information relating to third countries is given for information purposes only
            
            
                        Countries
                     
                     
                        Alphabetical country code (6)
                        
                     
                     
                        Numerical country code
                     
                     
                        Companies concerned by the square brackets in part 6 and part 7 (7)
                        
                     
                  
                        Albania
                     
                     
                        AL
                     
                     
                        41
                     
                     
                        HSh
                     
                  
                        Algeria
                     
                     
                        DZ
                     
                     
                        92
                     
                     
                        SNTF
                     
                  
                        Armenia
                     
                     
                        AM (8)
                        
                     
                     
                        58
                     
                     
                        ARM
                     
                  
                        Austria
                     
                     
                        A
                     
                     
                        81
                     
                     
                        ÖBB
                     
                  
                        Azerbaijan
                     
                     
                        AZ
                     
                     
                        57
                     
                     
                        AZ
                     
                  
                        Belarus
                     
                     
                        BY
                     
                     
                        21
                     
                     
                        BC
                     
                  
                        Belgium
                     
                     
                        B
                     
                     
                        88
                     
                     
                        SNCB/NMBS
                     
                  
                        Bosnia-Herzegovina
                     
                     
                        BIH
                     
                     
                        44
                     
                     
                        ŽRS
                     
                  
                        50
                     
                     
                        ŽFBH
                     
                  
                        Bulgaria
                     
                     
                        BG
                     
                     
                        52
                     
                     
                        BDZ, SRIC
                     
                  
                        China
                     
                     
                        RC
                     
                     
                        33
                     
                     
                        KZD
                     
                  
                        Croatia
                     
                     
                        HR
                     
                     
                        78
                     
                     
                        HŽ
                     
                  
                        Cuba
                     
                     
                        CU (8)
                        
                     
                     
                        40
                     
                     
                        FC
                     
                  
                        Cyprus
                     
                     
                        CY
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        Czech Republic
                     
                     
                        CZ
                     
                     
                        54
                     
                     
                        ČD
                     
                  
                        Denmark
                     
                     
                        DK
                     
                     
                        86
                     
                     
                        DSB, BS
                     
                  
                        Egypt
                     
                     
                        ET
                     
                     
                        90
                     
                     
                        ENR
                     
                  
                        Estonia
                     
                     
                        EST
                     
                     
                        26
                     
                     
                        EVR
                     
                  
                        Finland
                     
                     
                        FIN
                     
                     
                        10
                     
                     
                        VR, RHK
                     
                  
                        France
                     
                     
                        F
                     
                     
                        87
                     
                     
                        SNCF, RFF
                     
                  
                        Georgia
                     
                     
                        GE
                     
                     
                        28
                     
                     
                        GR
                     
                  
                        Germany
                     
                     
                        D
                     
                     
                        80
                     
                     
                        DB, AAE (9)
                        
                     
                  
                        Greece
                     
                     
                        GR
                     
                     
                        73
                     
                     
                        CH
                     
                  
                        Hungary
                     
                     
                        H
                     
                     
                        55
                     
                     
                        MÁV, GySEV/ROeEE (9)
                        
                     
                  
                        Iran
                     
                     
                        IR
                     
                     
                        96
                     
                     
                        RAI
                     
                  
                        Iraq
                     
                     
                        IRQ (8)
                        
                     
                     
                        99
                     
                     
                        IRR
                     
                  
                        Ireland
                     
                     
                        IRL
                     
                     
                        60
                     
                     
                        CIE
                     
                  
                        Israel
                     
                     
                        IL
                     
                     
                        95
                     
                     
                        IR
                     
                  
                        Italy
                     
                     
                        I
                     
                     
                        83
                     
                     
                        FS, FNME (9)
                        
                     
                  
                        Japan
                     
                     
                        J
                     
                     
                        42
                     
                     
                        EJRC
                     
                  
                        Kazakhstan
                     
                     
                        KZ
                     
                     
                        27
                     
                     
                        KZH
                     
                  
                        Kyrgyzstan
                     
                     
                        KS
                     
                     
                        59
                     
                     
                        KRG
                     
                  
                        Latvia
                     
                     
                        LV
                     
                     
                        25
                     
                     
                        LDZ
                     
                  
                        Lebanon
                     
                     
                        RL
                     
                     
                        98
                     
                     
                        CEL
                     
                  
                        Liechtenstein
                     
                     
                        LIE (8)
                        
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        Lithuania
                     
                     
                        LT
                     
                     
                        24
                     
                     
                        LG
                     
                  
                        Luxembourg
                     
                     
                        L
                     
                     
                        82
                     
                     
                        CFL
                     
                  
                        Macedonia (Former Yugoslav Republic of)
                     
                     
                        MK
                     
                     
                        65
                     
                     
                        CFARYM (MŽ)
                     
                  
                        Malta
                     
                     
                        M
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        Moldova
                     
                     
                        MD (8)
                        
                     
                     
                        23
                     
                     
                        CFM
                     
                  
                        Monaco
                     
                     
                        MC
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        Mongolia
                     
                     
                        MGL
                     
                     
                        31
                     
                     
                        MTZ
                     
                  
                        Morocco
                     
                     
                        MA
                     
                     
                        93
                     
                     
                        ONCFM
                     
                  
                        Netherlands
                     
                     
                        NL
                     
                     
                        84
                     
                     
                        NS
                     
                  
                        North Korea
                     
                     
                        PRK (8)
                        
                     
                     
                        30
                     
                     
                        ZC
                     
                  
                        Norway
                     
                     
                        N
                     
                     
                        76
                     
                     
                        NSB, JBV
                     
                  
                        Poland
                     
                     
                        PL
                     
                     
                        51
                     
                     
                        PKP
                     
                  
                        Portugal
                     
                     
                        P
                     
                     
                        94
                     
                     
                        CP, REFER
                     
                  
                        Romania
                     
                     
                        RO
                     
                     
                        53
                     
                     
                        CFR
                     
                  
                        Russia
                     
                     
                        RUS
                     
                     
                        20
                     
                     
                        RZD
                     
                  
                        Serbia-Montenegro
                     
                     
                        SCG
                     
                     
                        72
                     
                     
                        JŽ
                     
                  
                        Slovakia
                     
                     
                        SK
                     
                     
                        56
                     
                     
                        ŽSSK, ŽSR
                     
                  
                        Slovenia
                     
                     
                        SLO
                     
                     
                        79
                     
                     
                        SŽ
                     
                  
                        South Korea
                     
                     
                        ROK
                     
                     
                        61
                     
                     
                        KNR
                     
                  
                        Spain
                     
                     
                        E
                     
                     
                        71
                     
                     
                        RENFE
                     
                  
                        Sweden
                     
                     
                        S
                     
                     
                        74
                     
                     
                        GC, BV
                     
                  
                        Switzerland
                     
                     
                        CH
                     
                     
                        85
                     
                     
                        SBB/CFF/FFS, BLS (9)
                        
                     
                  
                        Syria
                     
                     
                        SYR
                     
                     
                        97
                     
                     
                        CFS
                     
                  
                        Tajikistan
                     
                     
                        TJ
                     
                     
                        66
                     
                     
                        TZD
                     
                  
                        Tunisia
                     
                     
                        TN
                     
                     
                        91
                     
                     
                        SNCFT
                     
                  
                        Turkey
                     
                     
                        TR
                     
                     
                        75
                     
                     
                        TCDD
                     
                  
                        Turkmenistan
                     
                     
                        TM
                     
                     
                        67
                     
                     
                        TRK
                     
                  
                        Ukraine
                     
                     
                        UA
                     
                     
                        22
                     
                     
                        UZ
                     
                  
                        United Kingdom
                     
                     
                        GB
                     
                     
                        70
                     
                     
                        BR
                     
                  
                        Uzbekistan
                     
                     
                        UZ
                     
                     
                        29
                     
                     
                        UTI
                     
                  
                        Vietnam
                     
                     
                        VN (8)
                        
                     
                     
                        32
                     
                     
                        DSVN
                     
                  PART 5 —   ALPHABETICAL MARKING OF THE INTEROPERABILITY CAPABILITY
            
               ‘TEN’: Vehicle which:
            
                        (a)
                     
                     
                        complies with all relevant TSIs which are in force at the moment of placing in service and has been authorised to be placed in service according to Article 22(1) of Directive 2008/57/EC and
                     
                  
                        (b)
                     
                     
                        is provided with an authorisation valid in all Member States in accordance with Article 23(1) of Directive 2008/57/EC.
                     
                  
               ‘PPV/PPW’: Vehicle which complies with PPV/PPW or PGW agreement (inside OSJD States)
            (original: PPV/PPW: ППВ (Правила пользования вагонами в международном сообщении); PGW: Правила Пользования Грузовыми Вагонами)
            
               Notes:
            
            
                        (a)
                     
                     
                        Vehicles marked TEN correspond to coding 0 to 3 of the first digit in the vehicle number specified in part 6
                     
                  
                        (b)
                     
                     
                        Vehicles which are not authorised for operation in all Member States need a marking indicating the Member States where they have been authorised. The list of authorising MS should be marked according to one of the following drawings, where D stands for the MS who has granted the first authorisation (in the given example, Germany) and F stands for the second authorising MS (in the given example, France). The MS are codified in accordance with part 4. This may cover vehicles which are TSI compliant or which are not. These vehicles correspond to coding 4 or 8 of the first digit in the vehicle number specified in part 6.
                     
                  PART 6 —   INTEROPERABILITY CODES USED FOR WAGONS (DIGITS 1-2)
            
                         
                     
                     
                        2nd digit
                        1st digit
                     
                     
                        0
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        2
                     
                     
                        3
                     
                     
                        4
                     
                     
                        5
                     
                     
                        6
                     
                     
                        7
                     
                     
                        8
                     
                     
                        9
                     
                     
                        2nd digit
                        1st digit
                     
                  
                         
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                        Gauge
                     
                     
                        fixed or variable
                     
                     
                        fixed
                     
                     
                        variable
                     
                     
                        fixed
                     
                     
                        variable
                     
                     
                        fixed
                     
                     
                        variable
                     
                     
                        fixed
                     
                     
                        variable
                     
                     
                        fixed or variable
                     
                     
                        Gauge
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        TSI (1) and/or COTIF (2) and/or PPW
                     
                     
                        0
                     
                     
                        with axles
                     
                     
                        Spare
                     
                     
                        TSI and/or COTIF wagons (2)
                        
                        
                           [of which keeper is a railway undertaking listed in part 4]
                        
                     
                     
                        Not to be used pending further decision
                     
                     
                        PPW wagons
                        (variable gauge)
                     
                     
                        with axles
                     
                     
                        0
                     
                  
                        1
                     
                     
                        with bogies
                     
                     
                        Wagons used by industry
                     
                     
                        with bogies
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                  
                        2
                     
                     
                        with axles
                     
                     
                        Spare
                     
                     
                        TSI and/or COTIF wagons (2)
                        
                        
                           [of which keeper is a railway undertaking listed in part 4]
                        
                        PPW wagons
                     
                     
                        TSI and/or COTIF wagons (2)
                        
                        PPW wagons
                     
                     
                        Others TSI and/or/or COTIF wagons (2)
                        
                        PPW wagons
                     
                     
                        PPW wagons
                        (fixed gauge)
                     
                     
                        with axles
                     
                     
                        2
                     
                  
                        3
                     
                     
                        with bogies
                     
                     
                        with bogies
                     
                     
                        3
                     
                  
                        Non TSI and non COTIF (2) and non PPW
                     
                     
                        4
                     
                     
                        with axles (3)
                        
                     
                     
                        Service wagons
                     
                     
                        Others wagons
                        
                           [of which keeper is a railway undertaking listed in part 4]
                        
                     
                     
                        Others wagons
                     
                     
                        Others wagons
                     
                     
                        Wagons with special numbering for technical characteristics
                     
                     
                        with axles (3)
                        
                     
                     
                        4
                     
                  
                        8
                     
                     
                        with bogies (3)
                        
                     
                     
                        with bogies (3)
                        
                     
                     
                        8
                     
                  
                         
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                        Traffic
                     
                     
                        Domestic traffic or international traffic by special agreement
                     
                     
                        International traffic by special agreement
                     
                     
                        Domestic traffic
                     
                     
                        International traffic by special agreement
                     
                     
                        Domestic traffic
                     
                     
                        International traffic by special agreement
                     
                     
                        Domestic traffic
                     
                     
                        International traffic by special agreement
                     
                     
                        Domestic traffic
                     
                     
                        Domestic traffic or international traffic by special agreement
                     
                     
                        Traffic
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                         
                     
                     
                        1st digit
                        2nd digit
                     
                     
                        0
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        2
                     
                     
                        3
                     
                     
                        4
                     
                     
                        5
                     
                     
                        6
                     
                     
                        7
                     
                     
                        8
                     
                     
                        9
                     
                     
                        1st digit
                        2nd digit
                     
                  PART 7 —   INTERNATIONAL TRAFFIC ABILITY CODES USED FOR HAULED PASSENGER VEHICLES (DIGITS 1-2)
            
               Warning: The conditions between square brackets are transitional and will be deleted with the evolutions of RIC (see general remarks, point 3).
            
                         
                     
                     
                        Domestic traffic
                     
                     
                        TSI (4) and/or RIC/COTIF (5) and/or PPW
                     
                     
                        Domestic traffic or international traffic by special agreement
                     
                     
                        TSI (4) and/or RIC/COTIF (5)
                        
                     
                     
                        PPW
                     
                  
                        2nd digit
                        1st digit
                     
                     
                        0
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        2
                     
                     
                        3
                     
                     
                        4
                     
                     
                        5
                     
                     
                        6
                     
                     
                        7
                     
                     
                        8
                     
                     
                        9
                     
                  
                        5
                     
                     
                        Vehicles for domestic traffic
                        
                           [of which keeper is a RIC railways undertaking listed in part 4]
                     
                     
                        Fixed-gauge non air-conditioned vehicles (including car-carrying wagons)
                        
                           [of which keeper is a RIC railways undertaking listed in part 4]
                        
                     
                     
                        Gauge-adjustable (1435/1520) non air-conditioned vehicles
                        
                           [of which keeper is a RIC railways undertaking listed in part 4]
                        
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Gauge-adjustable (1435/1672) non air-conditioned vehicles
                        
                           [of which keeper is a RIC railways undertaking listed in part 4]
                        
                     
                     
                        Vehicles with special numbering for technical characteristics
                     
                     
                        Fixed-gauge vehicles
                     
                     
                        Fixed-gauge vehicles
                     
                     
                        Gauge-adjustable (1435/1520) vehicles with change of bogies
                     
                     
                        Gauge-adjustable (1435/1520) vehicles with gauge-adjustable axles
                     
                  
                        6
                     
                     
                        Service vehicles not run in revenue-earning service
                     
                     
                        Fixed-gauge air-conditioned vehicles
                        
                           [of which keeper is a RIC railways undertaking listed in part 4]
                        
                     
                     
                        Gauge-adjustable (1435/1520) air-conditioned vehicles
                        
                           [of which keeper is a RIC railways undertaking listed in part 4]
                        
                     
                     
                        Service vehicles not run in revenue-earning service
                        
                           [of which keeper is a RIC railways undertaking listed in part 4]
                        
                     
                     
                        Gauge-adjustable (1435/1672) air-conditioned vehicles
                        
                           [of which keeper is a RIC railways undertaking listed in part 4]
                        
                     
                     
                        Car-carrying wagons
                     
                     
                        Gauge-adjustable vehicles
                     
                  
                        7
                     
                     
                        Air-conditioned and pressure-tight vehicles
                        
                           [of which keeper is a RIC railways undertaking listed in part 4]
                        
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Pressure-tight fixed-gauge air-conditioned vehicles
                        
                           [of which keeper is a RIVC railways undertaking listed part 4]
                        
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Other vehicles
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                  PART 8 —   TYPES OF TRACTIVE STOCK (DIGITS 1-2)
            The first digit is ‘9’.
            The second digit is defined by each Member State. It can for example fit with the self-checking digit if this digit is also calculated with the serial number.
            If the second digit describes the type of tractive stock, following coding is mandatory:
            
                        Code
                     
                     
                        General vehicle type
                     
                  
                        0
                     
                     
                        Miscellaneous
                     
                  
                        1
                     
                     
                        Electric locomotive
                     
                  
                        2
                     
                     
                        Diesel locomotive
                     
                  
                        3
                     
                     
                        Electric multiple-unit set (high speed) [power car or trailer]
                     
                  
                        4
                     
                     
                        Electric multiple-unit set (except high speed) [power car or trailer]
                     
                  
                        5
                     
                     
                        Diesel multiple-unit set [power car or trailer]
                     
                  
                        6
                     
                     
                        Specialised trailer
                     
                  
                        7
                     
                     
                        Electric shunting engine
                     
                  
                        8
                     
                     
                        Diesel shunting engine
                     
                  
                        9
                     
                     
                        Special vehicle
                     
                  PART 9 —   STANDARD NUMERICAL MARKING OF WAGONS (DIGITS 5 TO 8)
            This part indicates in tables the numerical marking in 4 figures associated to the main technical characteristics of the wagon.
            This part is distributed on a separate medium (electronic file).
            PART 10
            CODES FOR THE TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF HAULED PASSENGER STOCK (DIGITS 5-6)
            
                         
                     
                     
                        6th digit
                        5th digit
                     
                     
                        0
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        2
                     
                     
                        3
                     
                     
                        4
                     
                  
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        0
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                  
                        Vehicles with 1st class seats
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        10 side-corridor compartments or equivalent open-saloon space with centre aisle
                     
                     
                        ≥ 11 side-corridor compartments or equivalent open-saloon space with centre aisle
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Two or three axles
                     
                  
                        Vehicles with 2nd class seats
                     
                     
                        2
                     
                     
                        10 side-corridor compartments or equivalent open-saloon space with centre aisle
                     
                     
                        11 side-corridor compartments or equivalent open-saloon space with centre aisle
                     
                     
                        ≥ 12 side-corridor compartments or equivalent open-saloon space with centre aisle
                     
                     
                        Three axles
                     
                     
                        Two axles
                     
                  
                        Vehicles with 1st or 1st/2nd class seats
                     
                     
                        3
                     
                     
                        10 side-corridor compartments or equivalent open-saloon space with centre aisle
                     
                     
                        11 side-corridor compartments or equivalent open-saloon space with centre aisle
                     
                     
                        ≥ 12 side-corridor compartments or equivalent open-saloon space with centre aisle
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Two or three axles
                     
                  
                        1st or 1st/2nd class couchette cars
                     
                     
                        4
                     
                     
                        10 1st/2nd class compartments
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        ≤ 9 1st/2nd class compartments
                     
                  
                        2nd class couchette cars
                     
                     
                        5
                     
                     
                        10 compartments
                     
                     
                        11 compartments
                     
                     
                        ≥ 12 compartments
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                  
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        6
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                  
                        Sleeping cars
                     
                     
                        7
                     
                     
                        10 compartments
                     
                     
                        11 compartments
                     
                     
                        12 compartments
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                  
                        Vehicles of special design and vans
                     
                     
                        8
                     
                     
                        Driving trailer with seats, all classes, with or without luggage compartment, with driving cab for reversible working
                     
                     
                        Vehicles with 1st or 1st/2nd class seats with luggage or mail compartment
                     
                     
                        Vehicles with 2nd class seats with luggage or mail compartment
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Vehicles with seats, all classes with specially-fitted areas, e.g. children’s play area
                     
                  
                        9
                     
                     
                        Mail vans
                     
                     
                        Luggage vans with mail compartment
                     
                     
                        Luggage vans
                     
                     
                        Luggage vans and two or three-axle 2nd class vehicles with seats, with luggage or mail compartment
                     
                     
                        Side-corridor luggage vans, with or without compartment under customs seal
                     
                  
                        
                           Note: Fractions of a compartment are not considered. The equivalent accommodation in open saloon cars with centre aisle is obtained by dividing the number of available seats by 6, 8 or 10 depending on the construction of the vehicle.
                     
                  CODES FOR THE TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF HAULED PASSENGER STOCK (DIGITS 5-6)
            
                         
                     
                     
                        6th digit
                        5th digit
                     
                     
                        5
                     
                     
                        6
                     
                     
                        7
                     
                     
                        8
                     
                     
                        9
                     
                  
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        0
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                  
                        Vehicles with 1st class seats
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Double-deck coaches
                     
                     
                        ≥ 7 side-corridor compartments or equivalent open-saloon space with centre aisle
                     
                     
                        8 side-corridor compartments or equivalent open-saloon space with centre aisle
                     
                     
                        9 side-corridor compartments or equivalent open-saloon space with centre aisle
                     
                  
                        Vehicles with 2nd class seats
                     
                     
                        2
                     
                     
                        Only for OSJD, double-deck coaches
                     
                     
                        Double-deck coaches
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        ≥ 8 side-corridor compartments or equivalent open-saloon space with centre aisle
                     
                     
                        9 side-corridor compartments or equivalent open-saloon space with centre aisle
                     
                  
                        Vehicles with 1st or 1st/2nd class seats
                     
                     
                        3
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Double-deck coaches
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        ≥ 8 side-corridor compartments or equivalent open-saloon space with centre aisle
                     
                     
                        9 side-corridor compartments or equivalent open-saloon space with centre aisle
                     
                  
                        1st or 1st/2nd class couchette cars
                     
                     
                        4
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        ≤ 9 1st class compartments
                     
                  
                        2nd class couchette cars
                     
                     
                        5
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        ≤ 9 compartments
                     
                  
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        6
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                  
                        Sleeping cars
                     
                     
                        7
                     
                     
                        > 12 compartments
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                  
                        Vehicles of special design and vans
                     
                     
                        8
                     
                     
                        Coaches with seats and couchette cars, all classes, with bar or buffet area
                     
                     
                        Double-deck driving coach with seats, all classes, with or without luggage compartment, with driving cab for reversible working
                     
                     
                        Dining cars or coaches with bar or buffet area, with luggage compartment
                     
                     
                        Dining cars
                     
                     
                        Other special coaches (conference, disco, bar, cinema, video, ambulance coaches)
                     
                  
                        9
                     
                     
                        Two or three-axle luggage vans with mail compartment
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Two or three-axle car-carrying wagons
                     
                     
                        Car-carrying wagons
                     
                     
                        Service vehicles
                     
                  
                        
                           Note: Fractions of a compartment are not considered. The equivalent accommodation in open saloon cars with centre aisle is obtained by dividing the number of available seats by 6, 8 or 10 depending on the construction of the vehicle.
                     
                  CODES FOR THE GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF HAULED PASSENGER STOCK (DIGITS 7-8)
            
                        Energy supply
                        Maximum speed
                     
                     
                        8th digit
                        7th digit
                     
                     
                        0
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        2
                     
                     
                        3
                     
                     
                        4
                     
                     
                        5
                     
                     
                        6
                     
                     
                        7
                     
                     
                        8
                     
                     
                        9
                     
                  
                        < 120 km/h
                     
                     
                        0
                     
                     
                        All tensions (*)
                        
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        3 000  V~ + 3 000  V =
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~ (*)
                        
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        1 500  V~
                     
                     
                        Other tensions than 1 000  V, 1 500  V, 3 000  V
                     
                     
                        1 500  V~ + 1 500  V =
                     
                     
                        3 000  V =
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                  
                        1
                     
                     
                        All tensions (*) + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~ + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~ + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~ + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~ + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~ + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        1 500  V~ + 1 500  V = + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        3 000  V = + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        3 000  V = + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                  
                        2
                     
                     
                        Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        3 000  V~ + 3 000  V = + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        3 000  V~ + 3 000  V = + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        3 000  V~ + 3 000  V =1 500  V~ + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        1 500  V~ + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        1 500  V~ + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        A (10)
                        
                     
                  
                        121 to 140 km/h
                     
                     
                        3
                     
                     
                        All tensions
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~ + 3 000  V =
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~ (*)
                            (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~ (*)
                            (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~ + 1 500  V~ + 1 500  V =
                     
                     
                        1 500  V~ + 1 500  V =
                     
                     
                        3 000  V =
                     
                     
                        3 000  V =
                     
                  
                        4
                     
                     
                        All tensions (*) + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        All tensions + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        All tensions + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~ (*)
                            (10) + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        1 500  V~ + 1 500  V =
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~ + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        3 000  V~ + 3 000  V =
                     
                     
                        1 500  V~ + 1 500  V = + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        3 000  V = + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                  
                        5
                     
                     
                        All tensions (*) + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        All tensions + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        All tensions + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~ + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        1 500  V~ + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        Other tensions than 1 000  V, 1 500  V, 3 000  V
                     
                     
                        1 500  V~ + 1 500  V = + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                  
                        6
                     
                     
                        Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        3 000  V~ + 3 000  V =
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        3 000  V~ + 3 000  V =
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        A (10)
                        
                     
                  
                        141 to 160 km/h
                     
                     
                        7
                     
                     
                        All tensions (*)
                        
                     
                     
                        All tensions
                     
                     
                        1 500  V~ (10) + 3 000  V = (10) All tensions (11)
                        
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~ (*)
                        
                     
                     
                        1 500  V~ + 1 500  V =
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~
                     
                     
                        1 500  V~
                     
                     
                        1 500  V~ + 1 500  V =
                     
                     
                        3 000  V =
                     
                     
                        3 000  V =
                     
                  
                        8
                     
                     
                        All tensions (*) + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        All tensions + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        3 000  V~ + 3 000  V =
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        All tensions (*) + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~ + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        3 000  V~+ 3 000  V =
                     
                     
                        Other tensions than 1 000  V, 1 500  V, 3 000  V
                     
                     
                        All tensions (*) + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        A (10)
                        
                        G (11)
                        
                     
                  
                        > 160 km/h
                     
                     
                        9
                     
                     
                        All tensions (*)
                            (11)
                        
                     
                     
                        All tensions
                     
                     
                        All tensions + Steam (10)
                        
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~ + 1 500  V~
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~
                     
                     
                        1 000  V~
                     
                     
                        Reserved
                     
                     
                        1 500  V~ + 1 500  V =
                     
                     
                        3 000  V =
                     
                     
                        A (10)
                        
                        G (11)
                        
                     
                  
                  PART 11
            CODES FOR THE TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF SPECIAL VEHICLES (DIGIT 6 TO 8)
            
               Authorised speed for special vehicles (digit 6)
            
            
                        Classification
                     
                     
                        Self-propelled travelling speed
                     
                  
                        ≥ 100 km/h
                     
                     
                        < 100 km/h
                     
                     
                        0  km/h
                     
                  
                        Can be put into a train
                     
                     
                        V ≥ 100 km/h
                     
                     
                        Self-propelled
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        2
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        Non self-propelled
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                        3
                     
                  
                        V < 100 km/h and/or restrictions (6)
                        
                     
                     
                        Self-propelled
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                        4
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        Non self-propelled
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                        5
                     
                  
                        Cannot be put into a train
                     
                     
                        Self-propelled
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                        6
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        Non self-propelled
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                        7
                     
                  
                        Self-propelled rail/road vehicle than can be put into a train (7)
                        
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                        8
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        Self-propelled rail/road vehicle than cannot be put into a train (7)
                        
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                        9
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        Non self-propelled rail/road vehicle (7)
                        
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                         
                     
                     
                        0
                     
                  TYPE AND SUB-TYPE OF SPECIAL VEHICLE (DIGITS 7-8)
            
                        7th digit
                     
                     
                        8th digit
                     
                     
                        Vehicles/machines
                     
                  
                        1
                        Infrastructure and superstructure
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        Track laying and renewal train
                     
                  
                        2
                     
                     
                        Switches and crossing laying equipment
                     
                  
                        3
                     
                     
                        Track rehabilitation train
                     
                  
                        4
                     
                     
                        Ballast cleaning machine
                     
                  
                        5
                     
                     
                        Earthworks machine
                     
                  
                        6
                     
                  
                        7
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        8
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        9
                     
                     
                        Rail-mounted crane (excl. re-railing)
                     
                  
                        0
                     
                     
                        Other or general
                     
                  
                        2
                        Track
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        High capacity plain track tamping machine
                     
                  
                        2
                     
                     
                        Other plain track tamping machines
                     
                  
                        3
                     
                     
                        Tamping machine with stabilisation
                     
                  
                        4
                     
                     
                        Tamping machine for switches and crossings
                     
                  
                        5
                     
                     
                        Ballast plough
                     
                  
                        6
                     
                     
                        Stabilisation machine
                     
                  
                        7
                     
                     
                        Grinding and welding machine
                     
                  
                        8
                     
                     
                        Multi-purpose machine
                     
                  
                        9
                     
                     
                        Track inspection car
                     
                  
                        0
                     
                     
                        Other
                     
                  
                        3
                        Overhead line
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        Multi-purpose machine
                     
                  
                        2
                     
                     
                        Rolling and unrolling machine
                     
                  
                        3
                     
                     
                        Mast installation machine
                     
                  
                        4
                     
                     
                        Drum carrier machine
                     
                  
                        5
                     
                     
                        Overhead line tensioning machine
                     
                  
                        6
                     
                     
                        Machine with elevating work platform and machine with scaffold
                     
                  
                        7
                     
                     
                        Cleaning train
                     
                  
                        8
                     
                     
                        Greasing train
                     
                  
                        9
                     
                     
                        Overhead line inspection car
                     
                  
                        0
                     
                     
                        Other
                     
                  
                        4
                        Structures
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        Deck laying machine
                     
                  
                        2
                     
                     
                        Bridge inspection platform
                     
                  
                        3
                     
                     
                        Tunnel inspection platform
                     
                  
                        4
                     
                     
                        Gas purification machine
                     
                  
                        5
                     
                     
                        Ventilation machine
                     
                  
                        6
                     
                     
                        Machine with elevating work platform or with scaffold
                     
                  
                        7
                     
                     
                        Tunnel lighting machine
                     
                  
                        8
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        9
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        0
                     
                     
                        Other
                     
                  
                        5
                        Loading, unloading and various transport
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        Rail loading/unloading and transport machine
                     
                  
                        2
                     
                     
                        Loading/unloading and transport machine for ballast, gravel, etc.
                     
                  
                        3
                     
                  
                        4
                     
                  
                        5
                     
                     
                        Sleeper loading/unloading and transport machine
                     
                  
                        6
                     
                  
                        7
                     
                  
                        8
                     
                     
                        Loading/unloading and transport machine for switchgear, etc.
                     
                  
                        9
                     
                     
                        Loading/unloading and transport machine for other materials
                     
                  
                        0
                     
                     
                        Other
                     
                  
                        6
                        Measuring
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        Earthworks recording car
                     
                  
                        2
                     
                     
                        Track recording car
                     
                  
                        3
                     
                     
                        Overhead line recording car
                     
                  
                        4
                     
                     
                        Gauge recording car
                     
                  
                        5
                     
                     
                        Signalling recording car
                     
                  
                        6
                     
                     
                        Telecommunications recording car
                     
                  
                        7
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        8
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        9
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        0
                     
                     
                        Other
                     
                  
                        7
                        Emergency
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        Emergency crane
                     
                  
                        2
                     
                     
                        Emergency haulage car
                     
                  
                        3
                     
                     
                        Emergency tunnel train
                     
                  
                        4
                     
                     
                        Emergency car
                     
                  
                        5
                     
                     
                        Fire car
                     
                  
                        6
                     
                     
                        Sanitary vehicle
                     
                  
                        7
                     
                     
                        Equipment car
                     
                  
                        8
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        9
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        0
                     
                     
                        Other
                     
                  
                        8
                        Traction, transport, energy, etc.
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        Tractive units
                     
                  
                        2
                     
                  
                        3
                     
                     
                        Transport car (excl. 59)
                     
                  
                        4
                     
                     
                        Power car
                     
                  
                        5
                     
                     
                        Track car / powered car
                     
                  
                        6
                     
                  
                        7
                     
                     
                        Concreting train
                     
                  
                        8
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        9
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        0
                     
                     
                        Other
                     
                  
                        9
                        Environment
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        Self-propelled snow plough
                     
                  
                        2
                     
                     
                        Hauled snow plough
                     
                  
                        3
                     
                     
                        Snow broom
                     
                  
                        4
                     
                     
                        De-icing machine
                     
                  
                        5
                     
                     
                        Weed-killing machine
                     
                  
                        6
                     
                     
                        Rail cleaning machine
                     
                  
                        7
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        8
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        9
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        0
                     
                     
                        Other
                     
                  
                        0
                        Rail/road
                     
                     
                        1
                     
                     
                        Category 1 rail/road machine
                     
                  
                        2
                     
                  
                        3
                     
                     
                        Category 2 rail/road machine
                     
                  
                        4
                     
                  
                        5
                     
                     
                        Category 3 rail/road machine
                     
                  
                        6
                     
                  
                        7
                     
                     
                        Category 4 rail/road machine
                     
                  
                        8
                     
                  
                        9
                     
                     
                         
                     
                  
                        0
                     
                     
                        Other
                     
                  PART 12 —   LETTER MARKING FOR WAGONS EXCLUDING ARTICULATED AND MULTIPLE WAGONS
            DEFINITION OF THE CATEGORY AND INDEX LETTERS
            1.   Important notes
            
            In the attached tables:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        the information given in meters refers to the inside length of the wagons (lu);
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        the information given in tonnes (tu) corresponds to the highest load limit shown in the loading table for the wagon in question, this limit being determined in accordance with the procedures laid down.
                     
                  2.   Index letters with an international value common to all categories
            
            
                        q
                     
                     
                        pipe for electric heating which can be supplied by all accepted currents
                     
                  
                        qq
                     
                     
                        pipe and installation for electric heating which can be supplied by all accepted currents
                     
                  
                        s
                     
                     
                        wagons authorised to run under ‘s’ conditions (see Annex B of Rolling Stock TSI)
                     
                  
                        ss
                     
                     
                        wagons authorised to run under ‘ss’ conditions (see Annex B of Rolling Stock TSI)
                     
                  3.   Index letters with a national value
            
            t, u, v, w, x, y, z
            The value of these letters is defined by each Member State.
            CATEGORY LETTER: E — OPEN HIGH-SIDED WAGON
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        of ordinary type,
                        with side and end tipping, with flat floor
                        with 2 axles: lu ≥ 7,70 m; 25 t ≤ tu ≤ 30 t
                        with 4 axles: lu ≥ 12 m; 50 t ≤ tu ≤ 60 t
                        with 6 axles or more: lu ≥ 12 m; 60 t ≤ tu ≤ 75 t
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        a
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles
                     
                  
                        aa
                     
                     
                        with 6 axles or more
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        with floor traps (8)
                        
                     
                  
                        k
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: tu < 20 t
                        with 4 axles: tu < 40 t
                        with 6 axles or more: tu < 50 t
                     
                  
                        kk
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: 20 t ≤ tu < 25 t
                        with 4 axles: 40 t ≤ tu < 50 t
                        with 6 axles or more: 50 t ≤ tu < 60 t
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        without side tipping
                     
                  
                        ll
                     
                     
                        without floor traps (9)
                        
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: lu < 7,70 m
                        with 4 axles or more: lu < 12 m
                     
                  
                        mm
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles or more: lu >12 m (9)
                        
                     
                  
                        n
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: tu > 30 t
                        with 4 axles: tu > 60 t
                        with 6 axles or more: tu > 75 t
                     
                  
                        o
                     
                     
                        without end tipping
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        with station for brakeman (9)
                        
                     
                  CATEGORY LETTER: F — OPEN HIGH-SIDED WAGON
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        Of special type
                        with 2 axles: 25 t ≤ tu ≤ 30 t
                        with 3 axles: 25 t ≤ tu ≤ 40 t
                        with 4 axles: 50 t ≤ tu ≤ 60 t
                        with 6 axles or more: 60 t ≤ tu ≤ 75 t
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        a
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles
                     
                  
                        aa
                     
                     
                        with 6 axles or more
                     
                  
                        b
                     
                     
                        high capacity with axles (volume > 45 m3)
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        with controlled gravity unloading, on both sides, alternately, at the top (10)
                        
                     
                  
                        cc
                     
                     
                        with controlled gravity unloading, on both sides, alternately, at the bottom (10)
                        
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain
                     
                  
                        ff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by tunnel exclusively)
                     
                  
                        fff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by train-ferry exclusively)
                     
                  
                        k
                     
                     
                        with 2 or 3 axles: tu < 20 t
                        with 4 axles: tu < 40 t
                        with 6 axles or more: tu < 50 t
                     
                  
                        kk
                     
                     
                        with 2 or 3 axles: 20 t ≤ tu < 25 t
                        with 4 axles: 40 t ≤ tu < 50t
                        with 6 axles or more: 50 t ≤ tu < 60 t
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        with bulk gravity unloading, on both sides, simultaneously, at the top (10)
                        
                     
                  
                        ll
                     
                     
                        with bulk gravity unloading, on both sides, simultaneously, at the bottom (10)
                        
                     
                  
                        n
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: tu > 30 t
                        with 3 axles or more: tu > 40 t
                        with 4 axles: tu > 60 t
                        with 6 axles or more: tu > 75 t
                     
                  
                        o
                     
                     
                        with axial bulk gravity unloading, at the top (10)
                        
                     
                  
                        oo
                     
                     
                        with axial bulk gravity unloading, at the bottom (10)
                        
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        with axial controlled gravity unloading, at the top (10)
                        
                     
                  
                        pp
                     
                     
                        with axial controlled gravity unloading, at the bottom (10)
                        
                     
                  
                        ppp
                     
                     
                        with station for brakeman (11)
                        
                     
                  
                  CATEGORY LETTER: G — COVERED WAGON
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        Of ordinary type
                        with at least 8 ventilation apertures
                        with 2 axles: 9 m ≤ lu < 12 m; 25 t ≤ tu ≤ 30 t
                        with 4 axles: 15 m ≤ lu < 18 m; 50 t ≤ tu ≤ 60 t
                        with 6 axles or more: 15 m ≤ lu < 18 m; 60 t ≤ tu ≤ 75 t
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        a
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles
                     
                  
                        aa
                     
                     
                        with 6 axles or more
                     
                  
                        b
                     
                     
                        high capacity:
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    with 2 axles: lu ≥ 12 m and payload capacity ≥ 70 m3
                                    
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    with 4 axles or more: lu ≥ 18 m
                                 
                              
                  
                        bb
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles: lu > 18 m (12)
                        
                     
                  
                        g
                     
                     
                        for grain
                     
                  
                        h
                     
                     
                        for fruits and vegetables (13)
                        
                     
                  
                        k
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: tu < 20 t
                        with 4 axles: tu < 40t
                        with 6 axles or more: tu < 50 t
                     
                  
                        kk
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: 20 t ≤ tu < 25 t
                        with 4 axles: 40 t ≤ tu < 50 t
                        with 6 axles or more: 50 t ≤ tu < 60 t
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        with less than 8 ventilation apertures
                     
                  
                        ll
                     
                     
                        with enlarged doors apertures (12)
                        
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: lu < 9 m
                        with 4 axles or more: lu < 15 m
                     
                  
                        n
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: tu > 30 t
                        with 4 axles: tu > 60 t
                        with 6 axles or more: tu > 75 t
                     
                  
                        o
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: lu < 12 m and payload capacity ≥ 70 m3
                        
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        with station for brakeman (12)
                        
                     
                  CATEGORY LETTER: H — COVERED WAGON
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        of special type
                        with 2 axles: 9 m ≤ lu ≤ 12 m; 25 t ≤ tu ≤ 28 t
                        with 4 axles: 15 m ≤ lu < 18 m; 50 t ≤ tu ≤ 60 t
                        with 6 axles or more: 15 m ≤ lu < 18 m; 60 t ≤ tu ≤ 75 t
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        a
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles
                     
                  
                        aa
                     
                     
                        with 6 axles or more
                     
                  
                        b
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: 12 m ≤ lu ≤ 14 m and payload capacity ≥ 70 m3
                            (14)
                        
                        with 4 axles or more: 18 m ≤ lu < 22 m
                     
                  
                        bb
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: lu ≥ 14m
                        with 4 axles or more: lu ≥ 22 m
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        with end doors
                     
                  
                        cc
                     
                     
                        with end doors and fitted internally for the transport of motor cars
                     
                  
                        d
                     
                     
                        with floor traps
                     
                  
                        dd
                     
                     
                        with tipping body (15)
                        
                     
                  
                        e
                     
                     
                        with 2 floors
                     
                  
                        ee
                     
                     
                        with 3 floors or more
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (14)
                        
                     
                  
                        ff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by tunnel exclusively)
                     
                  
                        fff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by train-ferry exclusively) (14)
                        
                     
                  
                        g
                     
                     
                        for grain
                     
                  
                        gg
                     
                     
                        for cement (15)
                        
                     
                  
                        h
                     
                     
                        for fruits and vegetables (16)
                        
                     
                  
                        hh
                     
                     
                        for mineral fertilizer (15)
                        
                     
                  
                        i
                     
                     
                        with opening or shunt walls
                     
                  
                        ii
                     
                     
                        with very robust opening or shunt walls (17)
                        
                     
                  
                        k
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: tu < 20 t
                        with 4 axles: tu < 40 t
                        with 6 axles or more: tu < 50 t
                     
                  
                        kk
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: 20 t ≤ tu < 25 t
                        with 4 axles: 40 t ≤ tu < 50 t
                        with 6 axles or more: 50 t ≤ tu < 60 t
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        with movable partitions (18)
                        
                     
                  
                        ll
                     
                     
                        with lockable movable partitions (15)
                        
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: lu < 9 m
                        with 4 axles or more: lu < 15 m
                     
                  
                        mm
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles or more: lu > 18 m (15)
                        
                     
                  
                        n
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: tu > 28 t
                        with 4 axles: tu < 60 t
                        with 6 axles or more: tu > 75 t
                     
                  
                        o
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: lu 12 m < 14 m et volume utile ≥ 70 m3
                        
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        with station for brakeman (15)
                        
                     
                  CATEGORY LETTER: I — TEMPERATURE-CONTROLLED WAGON
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        refrigerator wagon
                        with class IN thermal insulation,
                        with motor-driven ventilation, with gratings and ice bunker ≥ 3,5 m3
                        
                        with 2 axles: 19 m2 ≤ floor area < 22 m2; 15 t ≤ tu ≤ 25 t
                        with 4 axles: floor area ≥ 39 m2; 30 t ≤ tu ≤ 40 t
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        a
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles
                     
                  
                        b
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles and large floor area: 22 m2 ≤ floor area ≤ 27 m2
                        
                     
                  
                        bb
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles and very large floor area: floor area > 27 m2
                        
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        with meat hooks
                     
                  
                        d
                     
                     
                        for fish
                     
                  
                        e
                     
                     
                        with electric ventilation
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain
                     
                  
                        ff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by tunnel exclusively)
                     
                  
                        fff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by train-ferry exclusively)
                     
                  
                        g
                     
                     
                        with mechanical refrigeration (19)
                            (20)
                        
                     
                  
                        gg
                     
                     
                        refrigerator with liquefied gas (19)
                        
                     
                  
                        h
                     
                     
                        with class IR thermal insulation
                     
                  
                        i
                     
                     
                        mechanically refrigerated by the machinery of an accompanying technical wagon (19)
                            (20)
                            (21)
                        
                     
                  
                        ii
                     
                     
                        accompanying technical wagon (19)
                            (21)
                        
                     
                  
                        k
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: tu > 15 t
                        with 4 axles: tu < 30 t
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        insulated without ice bunkers (19)
                            (22)
                        
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: floor area < 19 m2
                        
                        with 4 axles: floor area < 39 m2
                        
                     
                  
                        mm
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles: floor area ≥ 39 m2
                            (23)
                        
                     
                  
                        n
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: tu > 25 t
                        with 4 axles; tu > 40 t
                     
                  
                        o
                     
                     
                        with ice bunkers of capacity less than 3,5 m3
                            (22)
                        
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        without gratings
                     
                  
                  CATEGORY LETTER: K — 2-AXLE FLAT WAGON
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        Of ordinary type
                        with drop sides and short stanchions
                        lu ≥ 12 m; 25 t ≤ tu ≤ 30 t
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        b
                     
                     
                        with long stanchions
                     
                  
                        g
                     
                     
                        fitted for the transport of containers (24)
                        
                     
                  
                        i
                     
                     
                        with removable cover and non-removable ends (25)
                        
                     
                  
                        j
                     
                     
                        with shock-absorbing device
                     
                  
                        k
                     
                     
                        tu < 20 t
                     
                  
                        kk
                     
                     
                        20 t ≤ tu < 25 t
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        without stanchions
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        9 m ≤ lu < 12 m
                     
                  
                        mm
                     
                     
                        lu < 9 m
                     
                  
                        n
                     
                     
                        tu > 30 t
                     
                  
                        o
                     
                     
                        with non-removable sides
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        without sides (25)
                        
                     
                  
                        pp
                     
                     
                        with removable sides
                     
                  CATEGORY LETTER: L — 2-AXLE FLAT WAGON
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        of special type
                        lu ≥ 12 m; 25 t ≤ tu ≤ 30 t
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        b
                     
                     
                        with special fittings for securing purposes for medium-sized containers (pa) (26)
                        
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        with swivelling bolster (26)
                        
                     
                  
                        d
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of motor cars, without deck (26)
                        
                     
                  
                        e
                     
                     
                        with decks for the transport of motor cars (26)
                        
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain
                     
                  
                        ff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by tunnel exclusively)
                     
                  
                        fff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by train-ferry exclusively)
                     
                  
                        g
                     
                     
                        fitted for the transport of containers (except pa) (26)
                            (27)
                        
                     
                  
                        h
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of steel coils, eye to side (26)
                            (28)
                        
                     
                  
                        hh
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of steel coils, eye to sky (26)
                            (28)
                        
                     
                  
                        i
                     
                     
                        with removable cover and non-removable ends (26)
                        
                     
                  
                        ii
                     
                     
                        with very robust removable metallic cover (29) and non-removable ends (26)
                        
                     
                  
                        j
                     
                     
                        with shock-absorbing device
                     
                  
                        k
                     
                     
                        tu < 20 t
                     
                  
                        kk
                     
                     
                        20 t ≤ tu < 25 t
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        without stanchions (26)
                        
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        9 m ≤ lu < 12 m
                     
                  
                        mm
                     
                     
                        lu < 9 m
                     
                  
                        n
                     
                     
                        tu > 30 t
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        without sides (26)
                        
                     
                  CATEGORY LETTER: O — MIXED FLAT AND OPEN HIGH-SIDED WAGON
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        of ordinary type
                        with 2 or 3 axles, with drop sides or ends and stanchions
                        with 2 axles: lu ≥ 12 m; 25 t ≤ tu ≤ 30 t
                        with 3 axles: lu ≥ 12 m; 25 t ≤ tu ≤ 40 t
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        a
                     
                     
                        with 3 axles
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain
                     
                  
                        ff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by tunnel exclusively)
                     
                  
                        fff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by train-ferry exclusively)
                     
                  
                        k
                     
                     
                        tu < 20 t
                     
                  
                        kk
                     
                     
                        20 t ≤ tu < 25 t
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        without stanchions
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        9 m ≤ lu < 12 m
                     
                  
                        mm
                     
                     
                        lu < 9 m
                     
                  
                        n
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: tu > 30 t
                        with 3 axles: tu > 40 t
                     
                  CATEGORY LETTER: R — FLAT BOGIES WAGON
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        of ordinary type
                        with drop ends and stanchions
                        18 m ≤ lu < 22 m; 50 t ≤ tu ≤ 60 t
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        b
                     
                     
                        lu ≥ 22 m
                     
                  
                        e
                     
                     
                        with drop sides
                     
                  
                        g
                     
                     
                        fitted for the transport of containers (30)
                        
                     
                  
                        h
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of steel coils, eye to side (31)
                        
                     
                  
                        hh
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of steel coils, eye to sky (31)
                        
                     
                  
                        i
                     
                     
                        with removable cover and non-removable ends (32)
                        
                     
                  
                        j
                     
                     
                        with shock-absorbing device
                     
                  
                        k
                     
                     
                        tu < 40 t
                     
                  
                        kk
                     
                     
                        40 t ≤ tu < 50 t
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        without stanchions
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        15 m ≤ lu < 18 m
                     
                  
                        mm
                     
                     
                        lu < 15 m
                     
                  
                        n
                     
                     
                        tu > 60 t
                     
                  
                        o
                     
                     
                        with non-removable ends less than 2 m in height
                     
                  
                        oo
                     
                     
                        with non-removable ends, 2 m or more in height (32)
                        
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        without drop ends (32)
                        
                     
                  
                        pp
                     
                     
                        with removable sides
                     
                  CATEGORY LETTER: S — FLAT BOGIES WAGON
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        of special type
                        with 4 axles: lu ≥ 18 m; 50 t ≤ tu ≤ 60 t
                        with 6 axles or more: lu ≥ 22 m; 60 t ≤ tu ≤ 75 t
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        a
                     
                     
                        with 6 axles (2 bogies of 3 axles)
                     
                  
                        aa
                     
                     
                        with 8 axles or more
                     
                  
                        aaa
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles (2 bogies of 2 axles) (33)
                        
                     
                  
                        b
                     
                     
                        with special fittings for securing purposes for medium-sized containers (pa) (34)
                        
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        with swivelling bolster (34)
                        
                     
                  
                        d
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of motor cars, without deck (34)
                            (35)
                        
                     
                  
                        e
                     
                     
                        with decks for the transport of motor cars (34)
                        
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain
                     
                  
                        ff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by tunnel exclusively)
                     
                  
                        fff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by train-ferry exclusively)
                     
                  
                        g
                     
                     
                        fitted for the transport of containers, total loading length ≤ 60’ (except pa) (34)
                            (35)
                            (36)
                        
                     
                  
                        gg
                     
                     
                        fitted for the transport of containers, total loading length > 60’ (except pa) (34)
                            (35)
                            (36)
                        
                     
                  
                        h
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of steel coils, eye to side (34)
                            (37)
                        
                     
                  
                        hh
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of steel coils, eye to sky (34)
                            (37)
                        
                     
                  
                        i
                     
                     
                        with removable cover and non-removable ends (34)
                        
                     
                  
                        ii
                     
                     
                        with very robust removable metallic cover (38) and non-removable ends (34)
                        
                     
                  
                        j
                     
                     
                        with shock-absorbing device
                     
                  
                        k
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles: tu < 40 t
                        with 6 axles or more: tu < 50 t
                     
                  
                        kk
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles: 40 t ≤ tu < 50 t
                        with 6 axles or more: 50 t ≤ tu < 60 t
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        without stanchions (34)
                        
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles: 15 m ≤ lu < 18 m;
                        with 6 axles or more: 18 m ≤ lu < 22 m
                     
                  
                        mm
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles: lu < 15 m
                        with 6 axles or more: lu < 18 m
                     
                  
                        mmm
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles : lu ≥ 22 m (33)
                        
                     
                  
                        n
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles: tu > 60 t
                        with 6 axles or more: tu > 75 t
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        without sides (34)
                        
                     
                  CATEGORY LETTER: T — WAGON WITH OPENING ROOF
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: 9 m ≤ lu < 12 m; 25 t ≤ tu ≤ 30 t
                        with 4 axles: 15 m ≤ lu < 18 m; 50 t ≤ tu ≤ 60 t
                        with 6 axles or more: 15 m ≤ lu < 18 m; 60 t ≤ tu ≤ 75 t
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        a
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles
                     
                  
                        aa
                     
                     
                        with 6 axles or more
                     
                  
                        b
                     
                     
                        high capacity: with 2 axles: lu ≥ 12 m
                        with 4 axles or more: lu ≥ 18 m (39)
                            (40)
                        
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        with end doors
                     
                  
                        d
                     
                     
                        with controlled gravity unloading, on both sides, alternately, at the top (39)
                            (40)
                            (41)
                        
                     
                  
                        dd
                     
                     
                        with controlled gravity unloading, on both sides, alternately, at the bottom (39)
                            (40)
                            (41)
                        
                     
                  
                        e
                     
                     
                        with unobstructed height of the doors > 1,90 m (39)
                            (40)
                            (41)
                        
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain
                     
                  
                        ff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by tunnel exclusively)
                     
                  
                        fff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by train-ferry exclusively)
                     
                  
                        g
                     
                     
                        for grain
                     
                  
                        h
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of steel coils, eye to side
                     
                  
                        hh
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of steel coils, eye to sky
                     
                  
                        i
                     
                     
                        with opening walls (39)
                        
                     
                  
                        j
                     
                     
                        with shock-absorbing device
                     
                  
                        k
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: tu < 20 t
                        with 4 axles: tu < 40 t
                        with 6 axles or more: tu < 50 t
                     
                  
                        kk
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: 20 t ≤ tu < 25 t
                        with 4 axles: 40 t ≤ tu < 50 t
                        with 6 axles or more: 50 t ≤ tu < 60 t
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        with bulk gravity unloading, on both sides, simultaneously, at the top (39)
                            (40)
                            (41)
                        
                     
                  
                        ll
                     
                     
                        with bulk gravity unloading, on both sides, simultaneously, at the bottom (39)
                            (40)
                            (41)
                        
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: lu < 9 m
                        with 4 axles or more: lu < 15 m (40)
                        
                     
                  
                        n
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: tu > 30 t
                        with 4 axles: tu > 60 t
                        with 6 axles or more: tu > 75 t
                     
                  
                        o
                     
                     
                        with axial bulk gravity unloading, at the top (39)
                            (40)
                            (41)
                        
                     
                  
                        oo
                     
                     
                        with axial bulk gravity unloading, at the bottom (39)
                            (40)
                            (41)
                        
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        with axial controlled gravity unloading, at the top (39)
                            (40)
                            (41)
                        
                     
                  
                        pp
                     
                     
                        with axial controlled gravity unloading, at the bottom (39)
                            (40)
                            (41)
                        
                     
                  
                  CATEGORY LETTER: U — SPECIAL WAGONS
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        other than those in categories F, H, L, S ou Z
                        with 2 axles: 25 t ≤ tu ≤ 30 t
                        with 3 axles: 25 t ≤ tu ≤ 40 t
                        with 4 axles: 50 t ≤ tu ≤ 60t
                        with 6 axles or more: 60 t ≤ tu ≤ 75 t
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        a
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles
                     
                  
                        aa
                     
                     
                        with 6 axles or more
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        with unloading under pressure
                     
                  
                        d
                     
                     
                        with controlled gravity unloading, on both sides, alternately, at the top (42)
                        
                     
                  
                        dd
                     
                     
                        with controlled gravity unloading, on both sides, alternately, at the bottom (42)
                        
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain
                     
                  
                        ff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by tunnel exclusively)
                     
                  
                        fff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by train-ferry exclusively)
                     
                  
                        g
                     
                     
                        for grain
                     
                  
                        i
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport objects which should exceed the gauge if they were loaded on ordinary wagons (43)
                            (44)
                        
                     
                  
                        k
                     
                     
                        with 2 or 3 axles: tu < 20 t
                        with 4 axles: tu < 40 t
                        with 6 axles or more: tu < 50 t
                     
                  
                        kk
                     
                     
                        with 2 or 3 axles: 20 t ≤ tu < 25 t
                        with 4 axles: 40 t ≤ tu < 50 t
                        with 6 axles or more: 50 t ≤ tu < 60 t
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        with bulk gravity unloading, on both sides, simultaneously, at the top (42)
                        
                     
                  
                        ll
                     
                     
                        with bulk gravity unloading, on both sides, simultaneously, at the bottom (42)
                        
                     
                  
                        n
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: tu > 30 t
                        with 3 axles: tu > 40 t
                        with 4 axles: tu > 60 t
                        with 6 axles or more: tu > 75 t (44)
                        
                     
                  
                        o
                     
                     
                        with axial bulk gravity unloading, at the top (42)
                        
                     
                  
                        oo
                     
                     
                        with axial bulk gravity unloading, at the bottom (42)
                        
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        with axial bulk gravity unloading, at the top (42)
                        
                     
                  
                        pp
                     
                     
                        with axial bulk gravity unloading, at the bottom (42)
                        
                     
                  
                  CATEGORY LETTER: Z — TANK WAGON
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        with metal shell,
                        for the transport of liquids or gases
                        with 2 axles: 25 t ≤ lu ≤ 30 t
                        with 3 axles: 25 t ≤ tu ≤ 40 t
                        with 4 axles: 50 t ≤ tu ≤ 60 t
                        with 6 axles or more: 60 t ≤ tu ≤ 75 t
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        a
                     
                     
                        with 4 axles
                     
                  
                        aa
                     
                     
                        with 6 axles or more
                     
                  
                        b
                     
                     
                        for oil products (45)
                        
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        with unloading under pressure (46)
                        
                     
                  
                        d
                     
                     
                        for food and chemical products (45)
                        
                     
                  
                        e
                     
                     
                        fitted with heating devices
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain
                     
                  
                        ff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by tunnel exclusively)
                     
                  
                        fff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by train-ferry exclusively)
                     
                  
                        g
                     
                     
                        for the transport of gases under pressure, liquefied or dissolved under pressure (46)
                        
                     
                  
                        i
                     
                     
                        tank of non-metallic material
                     
                  
                        j
                     
                     
                        with shock-absorbing device
                     
                  
                        k
                     
                     
                        with 2 or 3 axles: tu < 20 t
                        with 4 axles: tu < 40 t
                        with 6 axles or more: tu < 50 t
                     
                  
                        kk
                     
                     
                        with 2 or 3 axles: 20 t ≤ tu < 25 t
                        with 4 axles: 40 t ≤ tu < 50 t
                        with 6 axles or more: 50 t ≤ tu < 60 t
                     
                  
                        n
                     
                     
                        with 2 axles: tu > 30 t
                        with 3 axles: tu > 40 t
                        with 4 axles tu > 60 t
                        with 6 axles or more: tu > 75 t
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        with station for brakeman (45)
                        
                     
                  LETTER MARKING FOR WAGONS FOR ARTICULATED AND MULTIPLE WAGONS
            DEFINITION OF THE CATEGORY AND INDEX LETTERS
            1.   Important notes
            
            In the attached tables, the information given in meters refers to the inside length of the wagons (lu).
            2.   Index letters with an international value common to all categories
            
            
                        q
                     
                     
                        pipe for electric heating which can be supplied by all accepted currents
                     
                  
                        qq
                     
                     
                        pipe and installation for electric heating which can be supplied by all accepted currents
                     
                  
                        s
                     
                     
                        wagons authorised to run under ‘s’ conditions (see annex B of rolling stock STI)
                     
                  
                        ss
                     
                     
                        wagons authorised to run under ‘ss’ conditions (see annex B of rolling stock STI)
                     
                  3.   Index letters with a national value
            
            t, u, v, w, x, y, z
            The value of these letters is defined by each Member State.
            CATEGORY LETTER: F — OPEN HIGH-SIDED WAGON
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        Articulated or multiple wagon
                        with axles, with 2 units
                        22 m ≤ lu < 27 m
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        a
                     
                     
                        with bogies
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        with controlled gravity unloading, on both sides, alternately, at the top (47)
                        
                     
                  
                        cc
                     
                     
                        with controlled gravity unloading, on both sides, alternately, at the bottom (47)
                        
                     
                  
                        E
                     
                     
                        with 3 units
                     
                  
                        ee
                     
                     
                        with 4 units or more
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain
                     
                  
                        ff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by tunnel exclusively)
                     
                  
                        fff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by train-ferry exclusively)
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        with bulk gravity unloading, on both sides, simultaneously, at the top (47)
                        
                     
                  
                        ll
                     
                     
                        with bulk gravity unloading, on both sides, simultaneously, at the bottom (47)
                        
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        with 2 units: lu ≥ 27 m
                     
                  
                        mm
                     
                     
                        with 2 units: lu < 22 m
                     
                  
                        o
                     
                     
                        with axial bulk gravity unloading, at the top (47)
                        
                     
                  
                        oo
                     
                     
                        with axial bulk gravity unloading, at the bottom (47)
                        
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        with axial controlled gravity unloading, at the top (47)
                        
                     
                  
                        pp
                     
                     
                        with axial controlled gravity unloading, at the bottom (47)
                        
                     
                  
                        r
                     
                     
                        articulated wagon
                     
                  
                        rr
                     
                     
                        multiple wagon
                     
                  
                  CATEGORY LETTER: H — COVERED WAGON
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        articulated or multiple wagon
                        with axles, with 2 units
                        22 m ≤ lu < 27 m
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        a
                     
                     
                        with bogies
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        with end doors
                     
                  
                        cc
                     
                     
                        with end doors and fitted internally for the transport of motor cars
                     
                  
                        d
                     
                     
                        with floor traps
                     
                  
                        e
                     
                     
                        with 3 units
                     
                  
                        ee
                     
                     
                        with 4 units or more
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain
                     
                  
                        ff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by tunnel exclusively)
                     
                  
                        fff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by train-ferry exclusively)
                     
                  
                        g
                     
                     
                        for grain
                     
                  
                        h
                     
                     
                        for fruits and vegetables (48)
                        
                     
                  
                        i
                     
                     
                        with opening or shunt walls
                     
                  
                        ii
                     
                     
                        with very robust opening or shunt walls (49)
                        
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        with movable partitions (50)
                        
                     
                  
                        ll
                     
                     
                        with lockable movable partitions (50)
                        
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        with 2 units: lu ≥ 27 m
                     
                  
                        mm
                     
                     
                        with 2 units: lu < 22 m
                     
                  
                        r
                     
                     
                        articulated wagon
                     
                  
                        rr
                     
                     
                        multiple wagon
                     
                  CATEGORY LETTER: I — TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED WAGON
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        refrigerator wagon
                        with class IN thermal insulation,
                        with motor-driven ventilation, with gratings and ice bunker ≥ 3,5 m3
                        
                        articulated or multiple wagon
                        with axles, with 2 units
                        22 m ≤ lu < 27 m
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        a
                     
                     
                        with bogies
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        with meat hooks
                     
                  
                        d
                     
                     
                        for fish
                     
                  
                        e
                     
                     
                        with electric ventilation
                     
                  
                        ee
                     
                     
                        with 4 units or more
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain
                     
                  
                        ff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by tunnel exclusively)
                     
                  
                        fff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by train-ferry exclusively)
                     
                  
                        g
                     
                     
                        with mechanical refrigeration (51)
                        
                     
                  
                        gg
                     
                     
                        refrigerator with liquefied gas (51)
                        
                     
                  
                        h
                     
                     
                        with class IR thermal insulation
                     
                  
                        i
                     
                     
                        mechanically refrigerated by the machinery of an accompanying technical wagon (51)
                            (52)
                        
                     
                  
                        ii
                     
                     
                        accompanying technical wagon (51)
                            (52)
                        
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        insulated without ice bunkers (51)
                            (53)
                        
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        with 2 units: lu ≥ 27 m
                     
                  
                        mm
                     
                     
                        with 2 units: lu < 22 m
                     
                  
                        o
                     
                     
                        with ice bunkers of capacity less than 3,5 m3
                            (53)
                        
                     
                  
                        oo
                     
                     
                        with 3 units
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        without gratings
                     
                  
                        r
                     
                     
                        articulated wagon
                     
                  
                        rr
                     
                     
                        multiple wagon
                     
                  CATEGORY LETTER: L — FLAT WAGON WITH SEPARATE AXLES
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        articulated or multiple wagon
                        with 2 units
                        22 m ≤ lu < 27 m
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        a
                     
                     
                        articulated wagon
                     
                  
                        aa
                     
                     
                        multiple wagon
                     
                  
                        b
                     
                     
                        with special fittings for securing purposes for medium-sized containers (pa) (54)
                        
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        with swivelling bolster (54)
                        
                     
                  
                        d
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of motor cars, without deck (54)
                        
                     
                  
                        e
                     
                     
                        with decks for the transport of motor cars (54)
                        
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain
                     
                  
                        ff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by tunnel exclusively)
                     
                  
                        fff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by train-ferry exclusively)
                     
                  
                        g
                     
                     
                        fitted for the transport of containers (54)
                            (55)
                        
                     
                  
                        h
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of steel coils, eye to side (54)
                            (56)
                        
                     
                  
                        hh
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of steel coils, eye to sky (54)
                            (56)
                        
                     
                  
                        i
                     
                     
                        with removable cover and non-removable ends (54)
                        
                     
                  
                        ii
                     
                     
                        with very robust removable metallic cover (57) and non-removable ends (54)
                        
                     
                  
                        j
                     
                     
                        with shock-absorbing device
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        without stanchions (54)
                        
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        with 2 units: 18 m ≤ lu < 22 m
                     
                  
                        mm
                     
                     
                        with 2 units: lu < 18 m
                     
                  
                        o
                     
                     
                        with 3 units
                     
                  
                        oo
                     
                     
                        with 4 units or more
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        without sides (54)
                        
                     
                  
                        r
                     
                     
                        with 2 units: lu ≥ 27 m
                     
                  CATEGORY LETTER: S — FLAT BOGIE WAGON
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        articulated or multiple wagon
                        with 2 units
                        22 m ≤ lu < 27 m
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        b
                     
                     
                        with special fittings for securing purposes for medium-sized containers (pa) (58)
                        
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        with swivelling bolster (58)
                        
                     
                  
                        d
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of motor cars, without deck (58)
                            (59)
                        
                     
                  
                        e
                     
                     
                        with decks for the transport of motor cars (58)
                        
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain
                     
                  
                        ff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by tunnel exclusively)
                     
                  
                        fff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by train-ferry exclusively)
                     
                  
                        g
                     
                     
                        fitted for the transport of containers, total loading length ≤ 60’ (except pa) (58)
                            (59)
                            (60)
                        
                     
                  
                        gg
                     
                     
                        fitted for the transport of containers, total loading length > 60’ (except pa) (58)
                            (59)
                            (60)
                        
                     
                  
                        h
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of steel coils, eye to side (58)
                            (61)
                        
                     
                  
                        hh
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of steel coils, eye to sky (58)
                            (61)
                        
                     
                  
                        i
                     
                     
                        with removable cover and non-removable ends (58)
                        
                     
                  
                        ii
                     
                     
                        with very robust removable metallic cover (58) and non-removable ends (62)
                        
                     
                  
                        j
                     
                     
                        with shock-absorbing device
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        without stanchions (58)
                        
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        with 2 units: lu ≥ 27 m
                     
                  
                        mm
                     
                     
                        with 2 units: lu < 22 m
                     
                  
                        o
                     
                     
                        with 3 units
                     
                  
                        oo
                     
                     
                        with 4 units or more
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        without sides (58)
                        
                     
                  
                        r
                     
                     
                        articulated wagon
                     
                  
                        rr
                     
                     
                        multiple wagon
                     
                  CATEGORY LETTER: T — WAGON WITH OPENING ROOF
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        articulated or multiple wagon
                        with axles, with 2 units
                        22 m ≤ lu < 27 m
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        a
                     
                     
                        with bogies
                     
                  
                        b
                     
                     
                        with unobstructed height of doors > 1,90 m (63)
                        
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        with end doors
                     
                  
                        d
                     
                     
                        with controlled gravity unloading, on both sides, alternately, at the top (64)
                        
                     
                  
                        dd
                     
                     
                        with controlled gravity unloading, on both sides, alternately, at the bottom (63)
                            (64)
                        
                     
                  
                        e
                     
                     
                        with 3 units
                     
                  
                        ee
                     
                     
                        with 4 units or more
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain
                     
                  
                        ff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by tunnel exclusively)
                     
                  
                        fff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by train-ferry exclusively)
                     
                  
                        g
                     
                     
                        for grain
                     
                  
                        h
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of steel coils, eye to side
                     
                  
                        hh
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport of steel coils, eye to sky
                     
                  
                        i
                     
                     
                        with opening walls (63)
                        
                     
                  
                        j
                     
                     
                        with shock-absorbing device
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        with bulk gravity unloading, on both sides, simultaneously, at the top (63)
                            (64)
                        
                     
                  
                        ll
                     
                     
                        with bulk gravity unloading, on both sides, simultaneously, at the bottom (63)
                            (64)
                        
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        with 2 units: lu ≥ 27 m
                     
                  
                        mm
                     
                     
                        with 2 units: lu < 22 m
                     
                  
                        o
                     
                     
                        with axial bulk gravity unloading, at the top (63)
                            (64)
                        
                     
                  
                        oo
                     
                     
                        with axial bulk gravity unloading, at the bottom (63)
                            (64)
                        
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        with axial controlled gravity unloading, at the top (63)
                            (64)
                        
                     
                  
                        pp
                     
                     
                        with axial controlled gravity unloading, at the bottom (63)
                            (64)
                        
                     
                  
                        r
                     
                     
                        articulated wagon
                     
                  
                        rr
                     
                     
                        multiple wagon
                     
                  
                  CATEGORY LETTER: U — SPECIAL WAGONS
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        articulated or multiple wagon,
                        with axles, with 2 units
                        22 m ≤ lu < 27 m
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        a
                     
                     
                        with bogies
                     
                  
                        e
                     
                     
                        with 3 units
                     
                  
                        ee
                     
                     
                        with 4 units or more
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        with unloading under pressure
                     
                  
                        d
                     
                     
                        with controlled gravity unloading, on both sides, alternately, at the top (65)
                        
                     
                  
                        dd
                     
                     
                        with controlled gravity unloading, on both sides, alternately, at the bottom (65)
                        
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain
                     
                  
                        ff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by tunnel exclusively)
                     
                  
                        fff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by train-ferry exclusively)
                     
                  
                        g
                     
                     
                        for grain
                     
                  
                        i
                     
                     
                        fitted out for the transport objects which should exceed the gauge if they were loaded on ordinary wagons (66)
                        
                     
                  
                        l
                     
                     
                        with bulk gravity unloading, on both sides, simultaneously, at the top (66)
                        
                     
                  
                        ll
                     
                     
                        with bulk gravity unloading, on both sides, simultaneously, at the bottom (66)
                        
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        with 2 units: lu ≥ 27 m
                     
                  
                        mm
                     
                     
                        with 2 units: lu < 22 m
                     
                  
                        o
                     
                     
                        with axial bulk gravity unloading, at the top (66)
                        
                     
                  
                        oo
                     
                     
                        with axial bulk gravity unloading, at the bottom (65)
                            (66)
                        
                     
                  
                        p
                     
                     
                        with axial controlled gravity unloading, at the top (65)
                        
                     
                  
                        pp
                     
                     
                        with axial controlled gravity unloading, at the bottom (65)
                        
                     
                  
                        r
                     
                     
                        articulated wagon
                     
                  
                        rr
                     
                     
                        multiple wagon
                     
                  
                  CATEGORY LETTER: Z — TANK WAGON
            
                        Reference wagon
                     
                     
                        with metal shell,
                        for the transport of liquids or gases
                        articulated or multiple wagon
                        with axles, with 2 units
                        22 m ≤ lu < 27 m
                     
                  
                        Index letters
                     
                     
                        a
                     
                     
                        with bogies
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        with unloading under pressure (67)
                        
                     
                  
                        e
                     
                     
                        fitted with heating devices
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain
                     
                  
                        ff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by tunnel exclusively)
                     
                  
                        fff
                     
                     
                        suitable for traffic with Great Britain (by train-ferry exclusively)
                     
                  
                        g
                     
                     
                        for the transport of gases under pressure, liquefied or dissolved under pressure (67)
                        
                     
                  
                        i
                     
                     
                        tank of non-metallic material
                     
                  
                        j
                     
                     
                        with shock-absorbing device
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        with 2 units: lu ≥ 27 m
                     
                  
                        mm
                     
                     
                        with 2 units: lu < 22 m
                     
                  
                        o
                     
                     
                        with 3 units
                     
                  
                        oo
                     
                     
                        with 4 units or more
                     
                  
                        r
                     
                     
                        articulated wagon
                     
                  
                        rr
                     
                     
                        multiple wagon
                     
                  PART 13 —   LETTER MARKING FOR HAULED PASSENGER STOCK
            
               Serial letters with an international value:
            
            
                        A
                     
                     
                        1st class coach with seats
                     
                  
                        B
                     
                     
                        2nd class coach with seats
                     
                  
                        AB
                     
                     
                        1st/2nd class coach with seats
                     
                  
                        WL
                     
                     
                        Sleeping-car with serial letter A, B or AB depending on the type of accommodation offered. The serial letters for sleeping-car with ‘special’ compartments are supplemented with index-letter ‘S’
                     
                  
                        WR
                     
                     
                        Dining-car
                     
                  
                        R
                     
                     
                        Coach with dining-car, buffet or bar compartment (serial-letter used in addition)
                     
                  
                        D
                     
                     
                        Van
                     
                  
                        DD
                     
                     
                        Open, 2-tier car-carrier van
                     
                  
                        Post
                     
                     
                        Mail van
                     
                  
                        AS
                        SR
                        WG
                     
                     
                        Bar coach with dancing facilities
                     
                  
                        WSP
                     
                     
                        Pullman coach
                     
                  
                        Le
                     
                     
                        Open 2-axle 2-tier car-carrier wagon
                     
                  
                        Leq
                     
                     
                        Open 2-axle 2-tier car-carrier wagon fitted with train supply cable
                     
                  
                        Laeq
                     
                     
                        Open 3-axle 2-tier car-carrier wagon fitted with train supply cable
                     
                  
               Index letters with an international value:
            
            
                        b
                        h
                     
                     
                        Coach fitted out to carry disabled passengers
                     
                  
                        c
                     
                     
                        Compartments convertible into couchette accommodation
                     
                  
                        d
                        v
                     
                     
                        Vehicle fitted to receive bicycles
                     
                  
                        ee
                        z
                     
                     
                        Vehicle fitted with central power supply
                     
                  
                        f
                     
                     
                        Vehicle fitted with driver’s cab (driving trailer)
                     
                  
                        p
                        t
                     
                     
                        Centre-aisle coach with seats
                     
                  
                        m
                     
                     
                        Vehicle over 24,5 m in length
                     
                  
                        s
                     
                     
                        Centre-aisle in vans and coaches with luggage compartment
                     
                  The number of compartments is shown in the form of an index (for example: Bc9)
            
               Serial letters and index letters with a national value
            
            The others serial letters and index letters have a national value, defined by each Member State.
            PART 14 —   LETTER MARKING FOR SPECIAL VEHICLES
            This marking is indicated in document EN 14033-1 ‘Railway applications — Track — Technical requirements for railbound construction and maintenance machines — Part 1: Running of railbound machines’.
            
               (1)  For tractive rolling stock, the number has to be unique in a given country with 6 digits.
            
               (2)  For special vehicles, the number has to be unique in a given country with the first digit and the 5 last digits of the technical characteristics and serial number.
            
               (3)  A vehicle keeper is the person, who being the owner of having the right to dispose of it, exploits a vehicle economically in a permanent manner as a means of transport and is registered as such in the Rolling Stock Register.
            
               (4)  For NMBS/SNCB, the use of an encircled single letter B can be continued.
            
               (5)  Diacritical marks are ‘accent-signs’, such as in À, Ç, Ö, Č, Ž, Å etc. Special letters such as Ø and Æ will be represented by a single letter; in tests for uniqueness Ø is treated as O and Æ as A.
            
               (6)  According to the alphabetical coding system described in Appendix 4 to the 1949 convention and Article 45(4) of the 1968 convention on road traffic.
            
               (7)  Companies who, at the time of coming into force, were members of UIC or OSJD and used the described country code as company code.
            
               (8)  Codes to be confirmed.
            
               (9)  Until the evolutions indicated in point 3 of the general remarks come into force, these companies can use the codes 43 (GySEV/ROeEE), 63 (BLS), 64 (FNME), 68 (AAE). The period of updating will then be defined together with the concerned Member States.
            
               (1)  Compliance at least with Rolling Stock TSI.
            
               (2)  Including vehicles, which according to existing regulations carry these digits at the time of coming into in force of these new regulations.
            
               (3)  Fixed or variable gauge.
            
               (4)  Compliance at least with future TSI on hauled passenger vehicles.
            
               (5)  Compliance with RIC or COTIF according to the regulation in force.
            
               (10)  Only for domestic traffic vehicles.
            
               (11)  Only for vehicles able to international traffic.
            
                        All tensions
                     
                     
                        Single phase alternating current 1 000 V 51 to 15 Hz, single phase alternating current 1 500 V 50 Hz, direct current 1 500 V, direct current 3 000 V. Can include single phase alternating current 3 000 V 50 Hz.
                     
                  
                        A
                     
                     
                        Autonomous heating, without train bus electricity supply line.
                     
                  
                        G
                     
                     
                        Vehicles with train bus electricity supply line for all voltages, but requiring a generator van to supply air-conditioning.
                     
                  
                        Steam
                     
                     
                        Steam heating only. If tensions are written, the code is also available for vehicles without steam heating.
                     
                  
               (*)  For certain vehicles with 1 000 V single phase alternating current, only one frequency, either 16 2/3 or 50 Hz, is permitted.
            
                        A
                     
                     
                        Autonomous heating, without train bus electricity supply line.
                     
                  
                        G
                     
                     
                        Vehicles with train bus electricity supply line for all voltages, but requiring a generator van to supply air-conditioning.
                     
                  
                        Steam
                     
                     
                        Steam heating only. If tensions are written, the code is also available for vehicles without steam heating.
                     
                  
               (6)  By restriction is meant a special position in a train (e.g. at the rear), an obligatory protection wagon, etc.
            
               (7)  Special conditions concerning inclusion in a train must be complied with.
            
               (8)  This concept only applies to open high-sided wagons with a flat floor, and provided with a device enabling them to be used, either as ordinary wagons with a flat bottom, or for gravity unloading of certain goods by suitable positioning of the traps.
            
               (9)  Only applicable to wagons with gauge of 1 520 mm.
            
               (10)  Wagons with gravity unloading in category F are open wagons, which do not have a flat floor and have no tipping facility either at the end or the side.
            
               (11)  Only applicable to wagons with gauge of 1 520 mm.
            The method of unloading these wagons is defined by a combination of the following characteristics:
            
                         
                     
                     
                        
                           Arrangement of the unloading apertures:
                        
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    axial
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Apertures situated above the centre of the track
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bilateral
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Apertures on either side of the track, outside the rails
                                    (For these wagons, unloading is:
                                    
                                                —
                                             
                                             
                                                simultaneous, if complete emptying of the wagon requires the apertures to be open on both sides,
                                             
                                          
                                                —
                                             
                                             
                                                alternate, if complete emptying of the wagon can take place by opening the apertures on one side only)
                                             
                                          
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    top
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    The lower edge of the discharge through (without taking into account mobile devices which may extend this through) is situated at least 0,700 m above the rail, and allows for the use of a conveyor belt to take away the goods
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bottom
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    The position of the lower edge of the discharge through does not allow for the use of a conveyor belt to take away the goods
                                 
                              
                  
                         
                     
                     
                        
                           Rate of unloading:
                        
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bulk
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Once the apertures are open for unloading, they cannot be closed again until the wagon is empty
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    controlled
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    At any time during unloading, the flow of the goods can be regulated or even stopped
                                 
                              
                  
               (12)  Only applicable to wagons with gauge of 1 520 mm.
            
               (13)  The concept ‘for fruits and vegetables’ applies only to wagons provided with additional ventilation apertures at the floor level.
            
               (14)  2-axle wagons bearing the index letters ‘f’, ‘fff’ can have a payload capacity less than 70 m3.
            
               (15)  Only applicable to wagons with gauge of 1 520 mm.
            
               (16)  The concept ‘for fruits and vegetables ’ applies only to wagons provided with additional ventilation apertures at the floor level.
            
               (17)  Only applicable to wagons with gauge of 1 435 mm.
            
               (18)  Movable partitions may be dismounted temporarily.
            
               (19)  The index letter ‘l’ shall not be marked on wagons bearing the index letters ‘g’, ‘gg’, ‘i’ or ‘ii’.
            
               (20)  Wagons bearing both the index letters ‘g’ and ‘i’ can be used individually or in a mechanically refrigerated raft.
            
               (21)  The concept of ‘accompanying technical wagon’ applies at the same time to factory wagons, workshop wagons (both with or without sleeping accommodation) and dormitory wagons.
            
               (22)  The index letter ‘o’ shall not be marked on wagons bearing the index letter ‘l’.
            
               (23)  Only applicable to wagons with gauge of 1 520 mm.
            
               Note: The floor area of covered refrigerator wagons is always determined taking into account the use of ice bunkers.
            
               (24)  Index letter ‘g’ may be used together with category letter K exclusively for ordinary wagons which have only been additionally fitted out for the transport of containers. Wagons fitted out solely for the transport of containers must be classified in category L.
            
               (25)  The index letter ‘p’ shall not be marked on wagons bearing index letter ‘i’.
            
               (26)  The inscription of the index letters ‘l’ or ‘p’ is optional for wagons bearing the index letters ‘b’, ‘c’, ‘d’, ‘e’, ‘g’, ‘h’, ‘hh’, ‘i’ or ‘ii’. But numerical codes must always correspond to letter markings on wagons.
            
               (27)  Wagons used solely for the transport of containers (except pa).
            
               (28)  Wagons used solely for the transport of steel coils.
            
               (29)  Only applicable to wagons with gauge of 1 435 mm.
            
               (30)  The use of the index letter ‘g’ associated with the category letter R is only possible in the case of ordinary wagons which have only been additionally fitted out for the transport of containers. Wagons fitted out solely for the transport of containers must be classified in category S.
            
               (31)  The use of the index letter ‘h’ or ‘hh’ together with the category letter R is only possible in the case of ordinary wagons which have only been additionally fitted out for the transport of containers. Wagons fitted out solely for the transport of containers must be classified in category S.
            
               (32)  The index letters ‘oo’ and/or ‘p’ shall not be marked on wagons bearing index letter ‘i’.
            
               (33)  Only applicable to wagons with gauge of 1 520 mm.
            
               (34)  The inscription of the index letters ‘l’ or ‘p’ is optional for wagons bearing the index letters ‘b’, ‘c’, ‘d’, ‘e’, ‘g’, ‘gg’, ‘h’, ‘hh’, ‘i’ or ‘ii’. But numerical codes must always correspond to letter markings on wagons.
            
               (35)  Wagons which in addition to the transport of containers and swap bodies are used to transport vehicles shall be marked with the index letters ‘g’ or ‘gg’ and the letter ‘d’.
            
               (36)  Wagons used solely for the transport of containers or for transport of swap bodies for grab handling and spreader gripping.
            
               (37)  Wagons used solely for the transport of steel coils.
            
               (38)  Only applicable to wagons with gauge of 1 435 mm.
            
               (39)  Index letter ‘e’:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        is optional on wagons bearing the index letter ‘b’ (but numerical codes must always correspond to letter markings on wagons),
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        shall not be marked on wagons bearing the index letters ‘d’,‘dd’,‘i’,‘l’,‘ll’,‘o’,‘oo’,‘p’ ou ‘pp’.
                     
                  
               (40)  Index letter ‘b’ and ‘m’ shall not be marked on wagons bearing the index letters ‘d’,‘dd’,‘l’,‘ll’,‘o’,‘oo’,‘p’ or ‘pp’.
            
               (41)  Wagons with gravity unloading in category T are wagons fitted with an opening roof giving access to a loading hatch over the complete length of the body; these wagons do not have a flat floor and are not designed for end or side tipping.
            The method of unloading these wagons is defined by a combination of the following characteristics:
            
                         
                     
                     
                        
                           Arrangement of the unloading apertures:
                        
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    axial
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Apertures situated above the centre of the track
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bilateral
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Apertures on either side of the track, outside the rails
                                    (For these wagons, unloading is:
                                    
                                                —
                                             
                                             
                                                simultaneous, if complete emptying of the wagon requires the apertures to be open on both sides,
                                             
                                          
                                                —
                                             
                                             
                                                alternate, if complete emptying of the wagon can take place by opening the apertures on one side only)
                                             
                                          
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    top
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    The lower edge of the discharge through (without taking into account mobile devices which may extend this through) is situated at least 0,700 m above the rail, and allows for the use of a conveyor belt to take away the goods
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bottom
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    The position of the lower edge of the discharge through does not allow for the use of a conveyor belt to take away the goods
                                 
                              
                  
                         
                     
                     
                        
                           Rate of unloading:
                        
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bulk
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Once the apertures are open for unloading, they cannot be closed again until the wagon is empty
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    controlled
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    At any time during unloading, the flow of the goods can be regulated or even stopped
                                 
                              
                  
               (42)  Wagons with gravity unloading in category U are closed wagons which can only be loaded through one or more loading apertures situated in at the top part of the body, and whose total opening dimensions are less than the length of the body; these wagons do not have a flat floor and are not designed for end or side tipping.
            
               (43)  In particular:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        well wagons
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        wagons with a central recess
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        wagons with an ordinary sloping diagonal permanent control desk
                     
                  
               (44)  Index letter ‘n’ shall not be marked on wagons bearing the index letter ‘i’.
            The method of unloading these wagons is defined by a combination of the following characteristics:
            
                         
                     
                     
                        Arrangement of the unloading apertures:
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    axial
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Apertures situated above the centre of the track
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bilateral
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Apertures on either side of the track, outside the rails
                                    (For these wagons, unloading is:
                                    
                                                —
                                             
                                             
                                                simultaneous, if complete emptying of the wagon requires the apertures to be open on both sides,
                                             
                                          
                                                —
                                             
                                             
                                                alternate, if complete emptying of the wagon can take place by opening the apertures on one side only)
                                             
                                          
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    top
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    The lower edge of the discharge through (without taking into account mobile devices which may extend this through) is situated at least 0,700 m above the rail, and allows for the use of a conveyor belt to take away the goods
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bottom
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    The position of the lower edge of the discharge through does not allow for the use of a conveyor belt to take away the goods
                                 
                              
                  
                         
                     
                     
                        
                           Rate of unloading:
                        
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bulk
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Once the apertures are open for unloading, they cannot be closed again until the wagon is empty
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    controlled
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    At any time during unloading, the flow of the goods can be regulated or even stopped
                                 
                              
                  
               (45)  Only applicable to wagons with gauge of 1 520 mm.
            
               (46)  The index letter ‘c’ shall not be marked on wagons bearing the index letter ‘g’.
            
               (47)  Wagons with gravity unloading in category F are open wagons, which do not have a flat floor and are not designed for end or side tipping.
            The method of unloading these wagons is defined by a combination of the following characteristics:
            
                         
                     
                     
                        
                           Arrangement of the unloading apertures:
                        
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    axial
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Apertures situated above the centre of the track
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bilateral
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Apertures on either side of the track, outside the rails
                                    (For these wagons, unloading is:
                                    
                                                —
                                             
                                             
                                                simultaneous, if complete emptying of the wagon requires the apertures to be open on both sides,
                                             
                                          
                                                —
                                             
                                             
                                                alternate, if complete emptying of the wagon can take place by opening the apertures on one side only)
                                             
                                          
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    top
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    The lower edge of the discharge through (without taking into account mobile devices which may extend this through) is situated at least 0,700 m above the rail, and allows for the use of a conveyor belt to take away the goods
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bottom
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    The position of the lower edge of the discharge through does not allow for the use of a conveyor belt to take away the goods
                                 
                              
                  
                         
                     
                     
                        
                           Rate of unloading:
                        
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bulk
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Once the apertures are open for unloading, they cannot be closed again until the wagon is empty
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    controlled
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    At any time during unloading, the flow of the goods can be regulated or even stopped
                                 
                              
                  
               (48)  The concept ‘for fruits and vegetables’ applies only to wagons provided with additional ventilation apertures at the floor level.
            
               (49)  Only applicable to wagons with gauge of 1 435 mm.
            
               (50)  Movable partitions may be dismounted temporarily.
            
               (51)  The index letter ‘l’ shall not be marked on wagons bearing the index letters ‘g’, ‘gg’, ‘i’ or ‘ii’.
            
               (52)  The concept of ‘accompanying technical wagon’ applies at the same time to factory wagons, workshop wagons (both with or without sleeping accommodation) and dormitory wagons.
            
               (53)  The index letter ‘o’ shall not be marked on wagons bearing the index letter ‘l’.
            
               (54)  The inscription of the index letters ‘l’ or ‘p’ is optional for wagons bearing the index letters ‘b’, ‘c’, ‘d’, ‘e’, ‘g’, ‘h’, ‘hh’, ‘i’ or ‘ii’. But numerical codes must always correspond to letter markings on wagons.
            
               (55)  Wagons used solely for the transport of containers (except pa).
            
               (56)  Wagons used solely for the transport of steel coils.
            
               (57)  Only applicable to wagons with gauge of 1 435 mm.
            
               (58)  The inscription of the index letters ‘l’ or ‘p’ is optional for wagons bearing the index letters ‘b’, ‘c’, ‘d’, ‘e’, ‘g’, ‘gg’, ‘h’, ‘hh’, ‘i’ or ‘ii’. But numerical codes must always correspond to letter markings on wagons.
            
               (59)  Wagons which in addition to the transport of containers and swap bodies are used to transport vehicles shall be marked with the index letters ‘g’ or ‘gg’ and the letter ‘d’.
            
               (60)  Wagons used solely for the transport of containers or for transport of swap bodies for grab handling and spreader gripping.
            
               (61)  Wagons used solely for the transport of steel coils.
            
               (62)  Only applicable to wagons with gauge of 1 435 mm.
            
               (63)  Index letter ‘b’ shall not be marked on wagons bearing the index letters ‘d’,‘dd’,‘i’,‘l’,‘ll’,‘o’,‘oo’,‘p’ or ‘pp’.
            
               (64)  Wagons with gravity unloading in category T are wagons fitted with an opening roof giving access to a loading hatch over the complete length of the body; these wagons do not have a flat floor and are not designed for end or side tipping.
            The method of unloading these wagons is defined by a combination of the following characteristics:
            
                         
                     
                     
                        
                           Arrangement of the unloading apertures:
                        
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    axial
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Apertures situated above the centre of the track
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bilateral
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Apertures on either side of the track, outside the rails
                                    (For these wagons, unloading is:
                                    
                                                —
                                             
                                             
                                                simultaneous, if complete emptying of the wagon requires the apertures to be open on both sides,
                                             
                                          
                                                —
                                             
                                             
                                                alternate, if complete emptying of the wagon can take place by opening the apertures on one side only)
                                             
                                          
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    top
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    The lower edge of the discharge through (without taking into account mobile devices which may extend this through) is situated at least 0,700 m above the rail, and allows for the use of a conveyor belt to take away the goods
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bottom
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    The position of the lower edge of the discharge through does not allow for the use of a conveyor belt to take away the goods
                                 
                              
                  
                         
                     
                     
                        
                           Rate of unloading:
                        
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bulk
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Once the apertures are open for unloading, they cannot be closed again until the wagon is empty
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    controlled
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    At any time during unloading, the flow of the goods can be regulated or even stopped
                                 
                              
                  
               (65)  Wagons with gravity unloading in category U are closed wagons which can only be loaded through one or more loading apertures situated in at the top part of the body, and whose total opening dimensions are less than the length of the body; these wagons do not have a flat floor and are not designed for end or side tipping.
            
               (66)  In particular:
            
                        —
                     
                     
                        well wagons
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        wagons with a central recess
                     
                  
                        —
                     
                     
                        wagons with an ordinary sloping diagonal permanent control desk
                     
                  The method of unloading these wagons is defined by a combination of the following characteristics:
            
                         
                     
                     
                        
                           Arrangement of the unloading apertures:
                        
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    axial
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Apertures situated above the centre of the track
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bilateral
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Apertures on either side of the track, outside the rails.
                                    (For these wagons, unloading is:
                                    
                                                —
                                             
                                             
                                                simultaneous, if complete emptying of the wagon requires the apertures to be open on both sides,
                                             
                                          
                                                —
                                             
                                             
                                                alternate, if complete emptying of the wagon can take place by opening the apertures on one side only)
                                             
                                          
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    top
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    The lower edge of the discharge through (without taking into account mobile devices which may extend this through) is situated at least 0,700 m above the rail, and allows for the use of a conveyor belt to take away the goods
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bottom
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    The position of the lower edge of the discharge through does not allow for the use of a conveyor belt to take away the goods
                                 
                              
                  
                         
                     
                     
                        
                           Rate of unloading:
                        
                        
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    bulk
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    Once the apertures are open for unloading, they cannot be closed again until the wagon is empty
                                 
                              
                                    —
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    controlled
                                 
                                 
                                    :
                                 
                                 
                                    At any time during unloading, the flow of the goods can be regulated or even stopped
                                 
                              
                  
               (67)  The index letter ‘c’ shall not be marked on wagons bearing the index letter ‘g’.
            
               Appendix Pa
               
                  PART “0” –   VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
               
               
                  General remarks
               
               This appendix describes the European Vehicle Number and linked marking applied in a visible manner on the vehicle to identify it uniquely and in a permanent manner during operation. It does not describe other numbers or markings eventually engraved or fixed in a permanent manner on the chassis or the main components of the vehicle during its construction.
               
                  European Vehicle number and linked abbreviations
               
               Each railway vehicle receives a number consisting of 12 figures (called European Vehicle Number (EVN)) with the following structure:
               
                           Rolling stock group
                        
                        
                           Interoperability capability and vehicle type
                           [2 figures]
                        
                        
                           Country in which the vehicle is registered
                           [2 figures]
                        
                        
                           Technical characteristics
                           [4 figures]
                        
                        
                           Serial number
                           [3 figures]
                        
                        
                           Check digit
                           [1 figure]
                        
                     
                           Wagons
                        
                        
                           00 to 09
                           10 to 19
                           20 to 29
                           30 to 39
                           40 to 49
                           80 to 89
                           
                              [details in part.6]
                           
                        
                        
                           01 to 99
                           
                              [details in part 4]
                           
                        
                        
                           0000 to 9999
                           
                              [details in part.9]
                           
                        
                        
                           000 to 999
                        
                        
                           0 to 9
                           
                              [details in part.3]
                           
                        
                     
                           Hauled passenger vehicles
                        
                        
                           50 to 59
                           60 to 69
                           70 to 79
                           
                              [details in part 7]
                           
                        
                        
                           0000 to 9999
                           
                              [details in part10]
                           
                        
                        
                           000 to 999
                        
                     
                           Tractive rolling stock and units in a trainset in fixed or pre-defined formation
                        
                        
                           90 to 99
                           
                              [details in part.8]
                           
                        
                        
                           0000000 to 8999999
                           
                              [the meaning of these figures is defined by the Member States, eventually by bilateral or multilateral agreement]
                           
                        
                     
                           Special vehicles
                        
                        
                           9000 to 9999
                           
                              [details in part11]
                           
                        
                        
                           000 to 999
                        
                     In a given country, the 7 digits of technical characteristics and serial number are sufficient to identify uniquely a vehicle inside the groups of hauled passenger vehicles and special vehicles (1).
               Alphabetical markings complete the number:
               
                           (a)
                        
                        
                           markings linked to the interoperability ability (details in part5);
                        
                     
                           (b)
                        
                        
                           abbreviation of the country in which the vehicle is registered (details in part4);
                        
                     
                           (c)
                        
                        
                           Vehicle Keeper Marking (details in part1);
                        
                     
                           (d)
                        
                        
                           abbreviations of the technical characteristics (details in part 12 for the wagons, part13 for the hauled passenger vehicles).
                           
                        
                     
                  Allocation of number
               
               The European Vehicle Number has to be allocated according to the rules laid down in Commission Decision 2007/756/EC (2)
               
               The European Vehicle Number shall be changed when it does not reflect the interoperability capability or technical characteristics according to this Appendix due to technical modifications of the vehicle. Such technical modifications may require a new placing in service according to Articles 20 to 25 of Directive 2008/57/EC.
               PART 1 –   VEHICLE KEEPER MARKING
               1.   DEFINITION OF THE VEHICLE KEEPER MARKING (VKM)
               A Vehicle Keeper Marking (VKM) is an alphabetic code, consisting of 2 to 5 letters (3). A VKM is inscribed on each rail vehicle, near the European Vehicle Number. The VKM identifies the Vehicle Keeper as registered in a National Vehicle Register.
               A VKM is unique and valid in all countries covered by this TSI and all countries that enter into an agreement that involves the application of the system of vehicle numbering and VKM as described in this TSI.
               2.   FORMAT OF THE VEHICLE KEEPER MARKING
               The VKM is representation of the full name or abbreviation of the vehicle keeper, if possible in a recognisable manner. All 26 letters of the Latina alphabet may be used. The letters in the VKM are written in capitals. Letters that do not stand for first letters of words in the keeper's name may be written in lower case. For checking uniqueness, the letters written in lower case will be taken as written in capitals.
               Letters may contain diacritical signs (4). Diacritical signs used by these letters are ignored for checking uniqueness.
               For vehicles of keepers that reside in a country that does not use the Latin alphabet, a translation of the VKM in its own alphabet may be applied behind the VKM separated from it by a slash-sign (“/”). This translated VKM is disregarded for data-processing purposes.
               3.   PROVISIONS ABOUT ALLOCATION OF VEHICLE KEEPER MARKINGS
               A vehicle keeper can be issued more than one VKM, in case:
               
                           —
                        
                        
                           the vehicle keeper has a formal name in more than one language;
                        
                     
                           —
                        
                        
                           a vehicle keeper has good cause to distinguish between separate vehicle fleets within his organisation.
                        
                     A single VKM can be issued for a group of companies:
               
                           —
                        
                        
                           that belong to single corporate structure (e.g. holding structure);
                        
                     
                           —
                        
                        
                           that belong to a single corporate structure that has appointed and mandated one organisation within this structure to handle all issues on behalf of all others;
                        
                     
                           —
                        
                        
                           that has mandated a separate, single legal entity for handling all issues on their behalf, in which event the legal entity is the keeper.
                        
                     4.   REGISTER OF VEHICLE KEEPER MARKINGS AND PROCEDURE FOR ALLOCATION
               The register of VKM is public and updated on a real time basis.
               An application for a VKM is filed with the applicant's competent national authority and forwarded to the ERA. A VKM can be used only after publication by the ERA.
               The holder of a VKM must inform the competent national authority when he ends the use of a VKM, and the competent national authority will forward the information to the ERA. A VKM will then be revoked once the keeper has proved that the marking has been changed on all vehicles concerned. It will not be reissued for 10 years, unless it is reissued to the original holder or at his request to another holder.
               A VKM can be transferred to another holder, which is the legal successor to the original holder. A VKM stays valid when the VKM’s holder changes his name to a name that does not bear resemblance to the VKM.
               In case of a change of keeper which entails a change of VKM, the wagons concerned must be marked with the new VKM within three months from the date of registration of the change of keeper in the National Vehicle Register. In case of inconsistency between the VKM marked on the vehicle and the data registered in the NVR, the NVR registration supersedes.
               PART 2 –   INSCRIPTION OF THE NUMBER AND LINKED ALPHABETICAL MARKING ON THE BODYWORK
               1.   GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS FOR EXTERNAL MARKINGS
               The capital letters and figures making up the marking inscriptions shall be at least 80 mm in height, in a sans serif font type of correspondence quality. A smaller height may only be used where there is no option but to place the marking on the sole bars.
               The marking is put not higher than 2 metres above rail level.
               2.   WAGONS
               The marking shall be inscribed on the wagon bodywork in the following manner:
               
                           23
                        
                        
                           TEN
                        
                        
                            
                        
                     
                           80
                        
                        
                           
                              D-RFC
                        
                        
                            
                        
                     
                           7369
                        
                        
                            
                        
                        
                           553-4
                        
                     
                           Zcs
                        
                        
                            
                        
                        
                            
                        
                     
                           31
                        
                        
                           TEN
                        
                        
                            
                        
                     
                           80
                        
                        
                           
                              D-DB
                        
                        
                            
                        
                     
                           0691
                        
                        
                            
                        
                        
                           235-2
                        
                     
                           Tanoos
                        
                        
                            
                        
                        
                            
                        
                     
                           33
                        
                        
                           TEN
                        
                        
                            
                        
                     
                           84
                        
                        
                           
                              NL-ACTS
                        
                        
                            
                        
                     
                           4796
                        
                        
                            
                        
                        
                           100-8
                        
                     
                           Slpss
                        
                        
                            
                        
                        
                            
                        
                     For wagons whose bodywork does not offer a large enough area for this type of arrangement, particularly in the case of flat wagons, the marking shall be arranged as follows:
               
                           01 87 3320 644-7
                        
                     
                           TEN
                        
                        
                           F-SNCF
                        
                        
                           Ks
                        
                     When one or more index letters with a national definition are inscribed on a wagon, this national marking must be shown after the international letter marking and separated from it by a hyphen as follows:
               
                           01 87 3320 644-7
                        
                     
                           TEN
                        
                        
                           F-SNCF
                        
                        
                           Ks-xy
                        
                     3.   COACHES AND HAULED PASSENGER STOCK
               The number shall be applied to each sidewall of the vehicle in the following manner:
               
                           
                              F-SNCF
                        
                        
                           61 87 20 - 72 021 - 7
                        
                     
                            
                        
                        
                           B10 tu
                        
                     The marking of the country in which the vehicle is registered and of the technical characteristics are printed directly in front of, behind or under the European Vehicle number.
               In case of coaches with driver’s cabin, the European Vehicle number is also written inside the cabin.
               4.   LOCOMOTIVES, POWER CARS AND SPECIAL VEHICLES
               The European Vehicle Number must be marked on each sidewall of the tractive stock in the following manner:
               92 10 1108 062-6
               The European Vehicle Number is also written inside each cabin of the tractive rolling stock.
               The keeper can add, in letters of larger size than the European Vehicle Number, an own number marking (consisting generally of digits of the serial number supplemented by alphabetical coding) useful in operations. The place where the own number is marked is left to the choice of the keeper; however it must always be possible to identify easily the EVN from the keeper’s own number marking.
               PART 3 –   RULES FOR THE DETERMINATION OF THE CHECK-DIGIT (DIGIT 12)
               The check-digit is determined in the following manner:
               
                           —
                        
                        
                           the digits in the even positions of the basic number (counting from the right) are taken at their own decimal value;
                        
                     
                           —
                        
                        
                           the digits in the odd positions of the basic number (counting from the right) are multiplied by 2;
                        
                     
                           —
                        
                        
                           the sum formed by the digits in even position and by all the digits which constitute the partial products obtained from the odd positions is then established;
                        
                     
                           —
                        
                        
                           the units digit of this sum is retained;
                        
                     
                           —
                        
                        
                           the complement required to bring the units digit to 10 forms the check-digit; should this units digit be nought, then the check-digit will also be nought.
                        
                     Examples
               
                        
                           1 —
                        
                        
                           
                                       Let the basic number be
                                    
                                    
                                       3 
                                    
                                    
                                       3 
                                    
                                    
                                       8 
                                    
                                    
                                       4 
                                    
                                    
                                       4 
                                    
                                    
                                       7 
                                    
                                    
                                       9 
                                    
                                    
                                       6 
                                    
                                    
                                       1 
                                    
                                    
                                       0 
                                    
                                    
                                       0 
                                    
                                 
                                       Multiplication factor
                                    
                                    
                                       2 
                                    
                                    
                                       1 
                                    
                                    
                                       2 
                                    
                                    
                                       1 
                                    
                                    
                                       2 
                                    
                                    
                                       1 
                                    
                                    
                                       2 
                                    
                                    
                                       1 
                                    
                                    
                                       2 
                                    
                                    
                                       1 
                                    
                                    
                                       2 
                                    
                                 
                                        
                                    
                                    
                                       6 
                                    
                                    
                                       3 
                                    
                                    
                                       16 
                                    
                                    
                                       4 
                                    
                                    
                                       8 
                                    
                                    
                                       7 
                                    
                                    
                                       18 
                                    
                                    
                                       6 
                                    
                                    
                                       2 
                                    
                                    
                                       0 
                                    
                                    
                                       0 
                                    
                                 Sum: 6 + 3 + 1 + 6 + 4 + 8 + 7 + 1 + 8 + 6 + 2 + 0 + 0 = 52
                           The units digit of this sum is 2.
                           The check-digit number will therefore be 8 and the basic number thus becomes the registration number 33 84 4796 100 - 8.
                        
                     
                        
                           2 —
                        
                        
                           
                                       Let the basic number be
                                    
                                    
                                       3 
                                    
                                    
                                       1 
                                    
                                    
                                       5 
                                    
                                    
                                       1 
                                    
                                    
                                       3 
                                    
                                    
                                       3 
                                    
                                    
                                       2 
                                    
                                    
                                       0 
                                    
                                    
                                       1 
                                    
                                    
                                       9 
                                    
                                    
                                       8 
                                    
                                 
                                       Multiplication factor
                                    
                                    
                                       2 
                                    
                                    
                                       1 
                                    
                                    
                                       2 
                                    
                                    
                                       1 
                                    
                                    
                                       2 
                                    
                                    
                                       1 
                                    
                                    
                                       2 
                                    
                                    
                                       1 
                                    
                                    
                                       2 
                                    
                                    
                                       1 
                                    
                                    
                                       2 
                                    
                                 
                                        
                                    
                                    
                                       6 
                                    
                                    
                                       1 
                                    
                                    
                                       10 
                                    
                                    
                                       1 
                                    
                                    
                                       6 
                                    
                                    
                                       3 
                                    
                                    
                                       4 
                                    
                                    
                                       0 
                                    
                                    
                                       2 
                                    
                                    
                                       9 
                                    
                                    
                                       16 
                                    
                                 Sum: 6 + 1 + 1 + 0 + 1 + 6 + 3 + 4 + 0 + 2 + 9 + 1 + 6 = 40
                           The units digit of this sum is 0.
                           The check-digit number will therefore be 0 and the basic number thus becomes the registration number 31 51 3320 198 - 0.
                        
                     PART 4 –   CODING OF THE COUNTRIES IN WHICH THE VEHICLES ARE REGISTERED (DIGITS 3-4 AND ABBREVIATION)
               
                  The Information relating to third countries is given for information purposes only.
               
               
                           Countries
                        
                        
                           Alphabetical country code (5)
                           
                        
                        
                           Numerical country code
                        
                     
                           Albania
                        
                        
                           AL
                        
                        
                           41
                        
                     
                           Algeria
                        
                        
                           DZ
                        
                        
                           92
                        
                     
                           Armenia
                        
                        
                           AM
                        
                        
                           58
                        
                     
                           Austria
                        
                        
                           A
                        
                        
                           81
                        
                     
                           Azerbaijan
                        
                        
                           AZ
                        
                        
                           57
                        
                     
                           Belarus
                        
                        
                           BY
                        
                        
                           21
                        
                     
                           Belgium
                        
                        
                           B
                        
                        
                           88
                        
                     
                           Bosnia-Herzegovina
                        
                        
                           BIH
                        
                        
                           49
                        
                     
                           Bulgaria
                        
                        
                           BG
                        
                        
                           52
                        
                     
                           China
                        
                        
                           RC
                        
                        
                           33
                        
                     
                           Croatia
                        
                        
                           HR
                        
                        
                           78
                        
                     
                           Cuba
                        
                        
                           CU (5)
                           
                        
                        
                           40
                        
                     
                           Cyprus
                        
                        
                           CY
                        
                        
                            
                        
                     
                           Czech Republic
                        
                        
                           CZ
                        
                        
                           54
                        
                     
                           Denmark
                        
                        
                           DK
                        
                        
                           86
                        
                     
                           Egypt
                        
                        
                           ET
                        
                        
                           90
                        
                     
                           Estonia
                        
                        
                           EST
                        
                        
                           26
                        
                     
                           Finland
                        
                        
                           FIN
                        
                        
                           10
                        
                     
                           France
                        
                        
                           F
                        
                        
                           87
                        
                     
                           Georgia
                        
                        
                           GE
                        
                        
                           28
                        
                     
                           Germany
                        
                        
                           D
                        
                        
                           80
                        
                     
                           Greece
                        
                        
                           GR
                        
                        
                           73
                        
                     
                           Hungary
                        
                        
                           H
                        
                        
                           55
                        
                     
                           Iran
                        
                        
                           IR
                        
                        
                           96
                        
                     
                           Iraq
                        
                        
                           IRQ (5)
                           
                        
                        
                           99
                        
                     
                           Ireland
                        
                        
                           IRL
                        
                        
                           60
                        
                     
                           Israel
                        
                        
                           IL
                        
                        
                           95
                        
                     
                           Italy
                        
                        
                           I
                        
                        
                           83
                        
                     
                           Japan
                        
                        
                           J
                        
                        
                           42
                        
                     
                           Kazakhstan
                        
                        
                           KZ
                        
                        
                           27
                        
                     
                           Kyrgyzstan
                        
                        
                           KS
                        
                        
                           59
                        
                     
                           Latvia
                        
                        
                           LV
                        
                        
                           25
                        
                     
                           Lebanon
                        
                        
                           RL
                        
                        
                           98
                        
                     
                           Liechtenstein
                        
                        
                           FL
                        
                        
                            
                        
                     
                           Lithuania
                        
                        
                           LT
                        
                        
                           24
                        
                     
                           Luxembourg
                        
                        
                           L
                        
                        
                           82
                        
                     
                           Macedonia
                        
                        
                           MK
                        
                        
                           65
                        
                     
                           Malta
                        
                        
                           M
                        
                        
                            
                        
                     
                           Moldova
                        
                        
                           MD (5)
                           
                        
                        
                           23
                        
                     
                           Monaco
                        
                        
                           MC
                        
                        
                            
                        
                     
                           Mongolia
                        
                        
                           MGL
                        
                        
                           31
                        
                     
                           Montenegro
                        
                        
                           ME
                        
                        
                           62
                        
                     
                           Morocco
                        
                        
                           MA
                        
                        
                           93
                        
                     
                           Netherlands
                        
                        
                           NL
                        
                        
                           84
                        
                     
                           North Korea
                        
                        
                           PRK (5)
                           
                        
                        
                           30
                        
                     
                           Norway
                        
                        
                           N
                        
                        
                           76
                        
                     
                           Poland
                        
                        
                           PL
                        
                        
                           51
                        
                     
                           Portugal
                        
                        
                           P
                        
                        
                           94
                        
                     
                           Romania
                        
                        
                           RO
                        
                        
                           53
                        
                     
                           Russia
                        
                        
                           RUS
                        
                        
                           20
                        
                     
                           Serbia
                        
                        
                           SRB
                        
                        
                           72
                        
                     
                           Slovakia
                        
                        
                           SK
                        
                        
                           56
                        
                     
                           Slovenia
                        
                        
                           SLO
                        
                        
                           79
                        
                     
                           South Korea
                        
                        
                           ROK
                        
                        
                           61
                        
                     
                           Spain
                        
                        
                           E
                        
                        
                           71
                        
                     
                           Sweden
                        
                        
                           SE
                        
                        
                           74
                        
                     
                           Switzerland
                        
                        
                           CH
                        
                        
                           85
                        
                     
                           Syria
                        
                        
                           SYR
                        
                        
                           97
                        
                     
                           Tajikistan
                        
                        
                           TJ
                        
                        
                           66
                        
                     
                           Tunisia
                        
                        
                           TN
                        
                        
                           91
                        
                     
                           Turkey
                        
                        
                           TR
                        
                        
                           75
                        
                     
                           Turkmenistan
                        
                        
                           TM
                        
                        
                           67
                        
                     
                           Ukraine
                        
                        
                           UA
                        
                        
                           22
                        
                     
                           United Kingdom
                        
                        
                           GB
                        
                        
                           70
                        
                     
                           Uzbekistan
                        
                        
                           UZ
                        
                        
                           29
                        
                     
                           Vietnam
                        
                        
                           VN (5)
                           
                        
                        
                           32
                        
                     PART 5 –   ALPHABETICAL MARKING OF THE INTEROPERABILITY CAPABILITY
               
                  “TEN”: Vehicle which:
               
                           (a)
                        
                        
                           complies with all relevant TSIs which are in force at the moment of placing in service and has been authorised to be placed in service according to Article 22(1) of Directive 2008/57/EC and
                        
                     
                           (b)
                        
                        
                           is provided with an authorisation valid in all Member States in accordance with Article 23(1) of Directive 2008/57/EC.
                        
                     
                  “PPV/PPW”: Vehicle which complies with PPV/PPW or PGW agreement (inside OSJD States)
               (original: PPV/PPW: ППВ (Правила пользования вагонами в международном сообщении); PGW: Правила Пользования Грузовыми Вагонами)
               
                  Notes:
               
               
                           (a)
                        
                        
                           Vehicles marked TEN correspond to coding 0 to 3 of the first digit in the vehicle number specified in appendix P, part 6
                        
                     
                           (b)
                        
                        
                           Vehicles which are not authorised for operation in all Member States need a marking indicating the Member States where they have been authorised. The list of authorising MS should be marked according to one of the following drawings, where D stands for the MS who has granted the first authorisation (in the given example, Germany) and F stands for the second authorising MS (in the given example, France). The MS are codified in accordance with part 4. This may cover vehicles which are TSI compliant or which are not. These vehicles correspond to coding 4 or 8 of the first digit in the vehicle number specified in part 6.
                        
                     PART 6 –   INTEROPERABILITY CODES USED FOR WAGONS (DIGITS 1-2).
               
                            
                        
                        
                           2nd digit
                           1st digit
                        
                        
                           0
                        
                        
                           1
                        
                        
                           2
                        
                        
                           3
                        
                        
                           4
                        
                        
                           5
                        
                        
                           6
                        
                        
                           7
                        
                        
                           8
                        
                        
                           9
                        
                        
                           2nd digit
                           1st digit
                        
                     
                            
                        
                        
                            
                        
                        
                           Track Gauge
                        
                        
                           fixed or variable
                        
                        
                           fixed
                        
                        
                           variable
                        
                        
                           fixed
                        
                        
                           variable
                        
                        
                           fixed
                        
                        
                           variable
                        
                        
                           fixed
                        
                        
                           variable
                        
                        
                           fixed or variable
                        
                        
                           Track Gauge
                        
                        
                            
                        
                     
                           TEN (1)
                           
                           and/or
                           COTIF (2)
                           
                           and/or
                           PPV/PPW
                        
                        
                           0
                        
                        
                           with axles
                        
                        
                           Not to be used
                        
                        
                           TEN (1) and/or COTIF wagons
                        
                        
                           not to be used (4)
                           
                        
                        
                           PPV/PPW wagons
                           (variable gauge)
                        
                        
                           with axles
                        
                        
                           0
                        
                     
                           1
                        
                        
                           with bogies
                        
                        
                           with bogies
                        
                        
                           1
                        
                     
                           TEN (1)
                           
                           and/or
                           COTIF (2)
                           
                           and/or
                           PPV/PPW
                        
                        
                           2
                        
                        
                           with axles
                        
                        
                           TEN (1) and /or COTIF wagons
                        
                        
                           PPV /PPWwagons
                           (fixed gauge)
                        
                        
                           with axles
                        
                        
                           2
                        
                     
                           3
                        
                        
                           with bogies
                        
                        
                           with bogies
                        
                        
                           3
                        
                     
                           Other wagons
                        
                        
                           4
                        
                        
                           with axles (3)
                           
                        
                        
                           maintenance related wagons
                        
                        
                           Other wagons
                        
                        
                           Wagons with special numbering for technical characteristics not placed in service inside EU
                        
                        
                           with axles
                        
                        
                           4
                        
                     
                           8
                        
                        
                           with bogies (3)
                           
                        
                        
                           with bogies
                        
                        
                           8
                        
                     
                            
                        
                        
                            
                        
                        
                           Traffic
                        
                        
                           Domestic traffic or international traffic by special agreement
                        
                        
                            
                        
                        
                            
                        
                     
                            
                        
                        
                           1st digit
                           2nd digit
                        
                        
                           0
                        
                        
                           1
                        
                        
                           2
                        
                        
                           3
                        
                        
                           4
                        
                        
                           5
                        
                        
                           6
                        
                        
                           7
                        
                        
                           8
                        
                        
                           9
                        
                        
                           1st digit
                           2nd digit
                        
                     PART 7 –   INTERNATIONAL TRAFFIC ABILITY CODES USED FOR HAULED PASSENGER VEHICLES (DIGITS 1-2)
               
                            
                        
                        
                           Domestic traffic
                        
                        
                           TEN (5) and/or COTIF (6) and/or PPV/PPW
                        
                        
                           Domestic traffic or international traffic by special agreement
                        
                        
                           TEN (5) and/or COTIF (6)
                           
                        
                        
                           PPV/PPW
                        
                     
                           2nd digit
                           1st digit
                        
                        
                           0
                        
                        
                           1
                        
                        
                           2
                        
                        
                           3
                        
                        
                           4
                        
                        
                           5
                        
                        
                           6
                        
                        
                           7
                        
                        
                           8
                        
                        
                           9
                        
                     
                           5
                        
                        
                           Vehicles for domestic traffic
                        
                        
                           Fixed-gauge non air-conditioned vehicles (including car-carrying wagons)
                        
                        
                           Gauge-adjustable (1435/1520) non air-conditioned vehicles
                        
                        
                           Not to be used
                        
                        
                           Gauge-adjustable (1435/1668) non air-conditioned vehicles
                        
                        
                           Historical vehicles
                        
                        
                           Not to be used (7)
                           
                        
                        
                           Fixed-gauge vehicles
                        
                        
                           Gauge-adjustable (1435/1520) vehicles with change of bogies
                        
                        
                           Gauge-adjustable (1435/1520) vehicles with gauge-adjustable axles
                        
                     
                           6
                        
                        
                           Service vehicles
                        
                        
                           Fixed-gauge air-conditioned vehicles
                        
                        
                           Gauge-adjustable (1435/1520) air-conditioned vehicles
                        
                        
                           Service vehicles
                        
                        
                           Gauge-adjustable (1435/1668) air-conditioned vehicles
                        
                        
                           Car-carrying wagons
                        
                        
                           Not to be used (7)
                           
                        
                     
                           7
                        
                        
                           Air-conditioned and pressure-tight vehicles
                        
                        
                           Not to be used
                        
                        
                           Not to be used
                        
                        
                           Pressure-tight fixed-gauge air-conditioned vehicles
                        
                        
                           Not to be used
                        
                        
                           Other vehicles
                        
                        
                           Not to be used
                        
                        
                           Not to be used
                        
                        
                           Not to be used
                        
                        
                           Not to be used
                        
                     PART 8 –   TYPES OF TRACTIVE ROLLING STOCK AND UNITS IN A TRAINSET IN FIXED OR PRE-DEFINED FORMATION (DIGITS 1-2)
               The first digit is “9”.
               If the second digit describes the type of tractive stock, following coding is mandatory:
               
                           Code
                        
                        
                           General vehicle type
                        
                     
                           0
                        
                        
                           Miscellaneous
                        
                     
                           1
                        
                        
                           Electric locomotive
                        
                     
                           2
                        
                        
                           Diesel locomotive
                        
                     
                           3
                        
                        
                           Electric multiple-unit set (high speed) [power car or trailer]
                        
                     
                           4
                        
                        
                           Electric multiple-unit set (except high speed) [power car or trailer]
                        
                     
                           5
                        
                        
                           Diesel multiple-unit set [power car or trailer]
                        
                     
                           6
                        
                        
                           Specialised trailer,
                        
                     
                           7
                        
                        
                           Electric shunting engine
                        
                     
                           8
                        
                        
                           Diesel shunting engine
                        
                     
                           9
                        
                        
                           Special vehicle
                        
                     PART 9 –   STANDARD NUMERICAL MARKING OF WAGONS (DIGITS 5 TO 8)
               This appendix indicates the numerical marking associated to the main technical characteristics of the wagon and it is published on the ERA website (http://www.era.europa.eu).
               An application for a new code is filed with the registering entity (as referred to in Decision 2007/756/EC) and sent to the ERA. A new code can be used only after publication by the ERA.
               PART 10 –   CODES FOR THE TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE HAULED PASSENGER STOCK (DIGITS 5-6)
               Part 10 is published on the ERA website (http://www.era.europa.eu).
               An application for a new code is filed with the registering entity (as referred to in Decision 2007/756/EC) and sent to the ERA. A new code can be used only after publication by the ERA.
               PART 11 –   CODES FOR THE TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SPECIAL VEHICLES (DIGIT 6 TO 8)
               Part 11 is published on the ERA website (http://www.era.europa.eu).
               An application for a new code is filed with the registering entity (as referred to in Decision 2007/756/EC) and sent to the ERA. A new code can be used only after publication by the ERA.
               PART 12 –   LETTER MARKING FOR WAGONS EXCLUDING ARTICULATED AND MULTIPLE WAGONS
               Part 12 is published on the ERA website (http://www.era.europa.eu).
               An application for a new code is filed with the registering entity (as referred to in Decision 2007/756/EC) and sent to the ERA. A new code can be used only after publication by the ERA.
               PART 13 –   LETTER MARKING FOR HAULED PASSENGER STOCK
               Part 13 is published on the ERA website (http://www.era.europa.eu).
               An application for a new code is filed with the registering entity (as referred to in Decision 2007/756/EC) and sent to the ERA. A new code can be used only after publication by the ERA.
               PART 14 –   LETTER MARKING FOR SPECIAL VEHICLES
               Deleted
               
                  (1)  For special vehicles, the number has to be unique in a given country with the first digit and the 5 last digits of the technical characteristics and serial number.
               
                  (2)  OJ L 305, 23.11.2007, p. 30.
               
                  (3)  For NMBS/SNCB, the use of an encircled single letter B can be continued
               
                  (4)  Diacritical marks are “accent-signs”, such as in À, Ç, Ö, Č, Ž, Å etc. Special letters such as Ø and Æ will be represented by a single letter; in tests for uniqueness Ø is treated as O and Æ as A.
               
                  (5)  According to the alphabetical coding system described in Appendix 4 to the 1949 convention and Article 45(4) of the 1968 convention on road traffic.
               
                  (1)  Wagons permitted to carry the marking TEN, see part 5.
               
                  (2)  Including wagons, which according to existing regulations carry the digits defined in the present table. COTIF: vehicle compliant with COTIF regulation in force at the moment of placing in service.
               
                  (3)  Fixed or variable gauge.
               
                  (4)  Excepted for wagons in category I (temperature-controlled wagons), not to be used for new vehicles placed in service.
               
                  (5)  Compliance with the applicable TSIs, see appendix P, part.5.
               
                  (6)  Including vehicles, which according to existing regulations carry the digits defined in the present table. COTIF: vehicle compliant with COTIF regulation in force at the moment of placing in service
               
                  (7)  Excepted for coaches with fixed gauge (56) and adjustable gauge (66) already in service, not to be used for new vehicles
            
         
         
            Appendix Q
            Not used
         
         
            Appendix R
            Not used
         
         
            Appendix S
            Not used
         
         
            Appendix T
            
               BRAKING PERFORMANCE
            
            A.   ROLE OF THE INFRASTRUCTURE MANAGER
            The IM shall inform the RU about the braking performance required for each route and has to provide information about the route characteristics. The IM has to ensure that the impact of the route characteristics and track-side related margins are included in the required braking performance.
            The required braking performance shall in principle be expressed in brake weight percentage unless the IM and RU have agreed on another unit to express the braking performance (e.g. braked tonnes, brake forces, deceleration values, deceleration profiles).
            For train sets and fixed train compositions the IM shall deliver the braking performance requirements in deceleration values if so requested by the RU.
            B.   ROLE OF THE RAILWAY UNDERTAKING
            The RU shall ensure that each train satisfies or exceeds the braking performance required by the IM. Therefore the RU shall calculate the braking performance of a train taking into account the train composition.
            The RU must take into account the vehicle or train set braking performance determined when placed in service. Rolling Stock-related margins like reliability and availability of the brakes have to be considered. The RU must also take into account the information about route characteristics which affect the train behaviour when tuning the braking performance for stopping and securing a train.
            The braking performance resulting from the checking of the actual train (like train composition, brake availability, brake settings) will be used as an input value for any operational rule to be subsequently applied to the train.
            C.   BRAKING PERFORMANCE NOT ACHIEVED
            The IM has to set up rules to be used if a train does not reach the required braking performance and has to make these rules available to the RUs.
            If a train does not reach the braking performance required for the routes the train shall run, the RU has to respect the resulting constraints like speed restriction.
         
         
            Appendix U
            
               LIST OF OPEN POINTS
            
            APPENDIX B (SEE POINT 4.4 OF THIS TSI)
            Other rules enabling a coherent operation
            POINT 4.2.2.1.3.3
            Freight trains not crossing a border between Member States
         
         
            Appendix V
            Not used
         
         
            Appendix W
            
               GLOSSARY
            
            
               The definitions in this glossary refer to the use of terms in this TSI OPE CR.
            
            
                        Term
                     
                     
                        Definition
                     
                  
                        Accident
                     
                     
                        As defined in Article 3 of Directive 2004/49/EC.
                     
                  
                        Authorising the movement of trains
                     
                     
                        The operation of equipment in signalling centres, electric traction current supply control rooms and traffic control centres that permits train movement. This does not include those staff employed by a Railway Undertaking who are responsible for management of resources such as train crew or rolling stock.
                     
                  
                        Competence
                     
                     
                        The qualification and experience necessary to safely and reliably undertake the task being performed. Experience can be gained as part of the training process.
                     
                  
                        Dangerous goods
                     
                     
                        As covered by Directive 2008/68/EC of 24 September 2008 on the inland transport of dangerous goods
                     
                  
                        Degraded operation
                     
                     
                        Operation resulting from an unplanned event that prevents the normal delivery of train services.
                     
                  
                        Despatch (= dispatch)
                     
                     
                        See Train despatch
                     
                  
                        Driver
                     
                     
                        As defined in Article 3 of Directive 2007/59/EC.
                     
                  
                        Exceptional loads
                     
                     
                        A load carried on a rail vehicle, for example a container, swap body or other traffic where the rail vehicle size and/or axle loading requires special authority for the movement and/or the application of special conditions of travel for all or part of the journey.
                     
                  
                        Health and Safety Conditions
                     
                     
                        In the context of this TSI, this refers only to the medical and psychological qualifications required to operate the relevant elements of the subsystem.
                     
                  
                        Hot axle box
                     
                     
                        An axle box and bearing that has exceeded its maximum designed operating temperature.
                     
                  
                        Incident
                     
                     
                        As defined in Article 3 of Directive 2004/49/EC.
                     
                  
                        Length of train
                     
                     
                        Total length of all vehicles over buffers including locomotive(s)
                     
                  
                        Operating Language
                     
                     
                        The language or languages used in daily operation an Infrastructure Manager and published in his Network Statement, for the communication of operational or safety related messages between the staff of the Infrastructure Manager and the Railway Undertaking.
                     
                  
                        Passenger
                     
                     
                        Person (other than an employee with specific duties on the train) travelling by train or on railway property before or after a train journey.
                     
                  
                        Performance monitoring
                     
                     
                        The systematic observation and recording of the performance of the train service and the infrastructure for the purpose of bringing about improvements in the performance of both.
                     
                  
                        Qualification
                     
                     
                        The physical and psychological suitability for the task together with the required knowledge.
                     
                  
                        Real time
                     
                     
                        The ability to exchange or process information on specified events (such as arrival at a station, passing a station or departure from a station) on the trains journey as they occur.
                     
                  
                        Reporting point
                     
                     
                        A point on the trains schedule where reporting of the arrival, departure or passing time is required.
                     
                  
                        Route
                     
                     
                        The particular section or sections of line
                     
                  
                        Safety-critical work
                     
                     
                        Work performed by staff when they control or affect the movement of a vehicle, which could affect the health, and safety of persons.
                     
                  
                        Staff
                     
                     
                        Employees working for a Railway Undertaking or an Infrastructure Manager, or their contractors, undertaking tasks as specified in this TSI.
                     
                  
                        Stopping point
                     
                     
                        A location identified in the schedule of a train where the train is planned to stop, usually to carry out a specific activity such as allowing passengers to join and leave the train.
                     
                  
                        Timetable
                     
                     
                        Document or system that gives details of a train(s) schedule over a particular route.
                     
                  
                        Timing point
                     
                     
                        A location identified in the schedule of a train where a specific time is identified. This time may be an arrival time, departure time or in the case of a train not scheduled to stop at that location the passing time.
                     
                  
                        Traction unit
                     
                     
                        A powered vehicle able to move itself and other vehicles to which it may be coupled.
                     
                  
                        Train
                     
                     
                        A train is defined as (a) traction unit(s) with or without coupled railway vehicles with train data available operating between two or more defined points.
                     
                  
                        Train despatch
                     
                     
                        The indication to the person driving the train that all station or depot activities are completed and that, as far as the staff responsible are concerned, movement authority has been granted for the train.
                     
                  
                        Train crew
                     
                     
                        Members of the on-board staff of a train, who are certified as competent and appointed by a Railway Undertaking to carry out specific, designated safety related tasks on the train, for example the driver or the guard.
                     
                  
                        Train preparation
                     
                     
                        Ensuring that a train is in a fit condition to enter service, that the train equipment is correctly deployed and the formation of the train matches the train’s designated pathway. Train preparation also includes technical inspections carried out prior to the train entering service.
                     
                  
               
            
                        Abbreviation
                     
                     
                        Explanation
                     
                  
                        AC
                     
                     
                        Alternating current
                     
                  
                        CCS
                     
                     
                        Command Control Signalling
                     
                  
                        CEN
                     
                     
                        European Committee for Standardisation (Comité Européen de Normalisation)
                     
                  
                        COTIF
                     
                     
                        Convention Concerning International Carriage by Rail (COnvention relative aux Transports Internationaux Ferroviaires)
                     
                  
                        CR
                     
                     
                        Conventional Rail
                     
                  
                        dB
                     
                     
                        Decibels
                     
                  
                        DC
                     
                     
                        Direct Current
                     
                  
                        DMI
                     
                     
                        Driver Machine Interface
                     
                  
                        EC
                     
                     
                        European Community
                     
                  
                        ECG
                     
                     
                        Electro Cardiogram
                     
                  
                        EIRENE
                     
                     
                        European Integrated Railway Radio Enhanced Network
                     
                  
                        EN
                     
                     
                        Euro-norm
                     
                  
                        ENE
                     
                     
                        Energy
                     
                  
                        ERA
                     
                     
                        European Rail Agency
                     
                  
                        ERTMS
                     
                     
                        European Rail Traffic Management System
                     
                  
                        ETCS
                     
                     
                        European Train Control System
                     
                  
                        EU
                     
                     
                        European Union
                     
                  
                        FRS
                     
                     
                        Functional Requirement Specification
                     
                  
                        GSM-R
                     
                     
                        Global System for Mobile Communications — Rail
                     
                  
                        HABD
                     
                     
                        Hot Axle Box Detector
                     
                  
                        Hz
                     
                     
                        Hertz
                     
                  
                        IM
                     
                     
                        Infrastructure Manager
                     
                  
                        INF
                     
                     
                        Infrastructure
                     
                  
                        OPE
                     
                     
                        Operation and Traffic Management
                     
                  
                        OSJD
                     
                     
                        Organisation for Co-operation of Railways
                     
                  
                        PPV/PPW
                     
                     
                        Russian abbreviation for Prawila Polzowaniia Wagonami w mejdunarodnom soobqenii = Rules for use of railway vehicles in international traffic
                     
                  
                        RST
                     
                     
                        Rolling Stock
                     
                  
                        RU
                     
                     
                        Railway Undertaking
                     
                  
                        SMS
                     
                     
                        Safety Management System
                     
                  
                        SPAD
                     
                     
                        Signal Passed at Danger
                     
                  
                        SRS
                     
                     
                        System Requirement Specification
                     
                  
                        TAF
                     
                     
                        Telematic Applications for Freight
                     
                  
                        TEN
                     
                     
                        Trans-European Network
                     
                  
                        TSI
                     
                     
                        Technical Specification for Interoperability
                     
                  
                        UIC
                     
                     
                        International Union of Railways (Union Internationale des Chemins de fer)
                     
                  
                        VKM
                     
                     
                        Vehicle Keeper Marking